Patran 2008 R1 Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Patran 2008 r1 Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Main Index

Corporate

Europe

Asia Pacific

MSC.Software Corporation 2 MacArthur Place Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA Telephone: (800) 345-2078 Fax: (714) 784-4056

MSC.Software GmbH Am Moosfeld 13 81829 Munich, Germany Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0 Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6

MSC.Software Japan Ltd. Shinjuku First West 8F 23-7 Nishi Shinjuku 1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Web www.mscsoftware.com

Disclaimer This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license. MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein. User Documentation: Copyright ©2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved. This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited. The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers. Contains IBM XL Fortran for AIX V8.1, Runtime Modules, (c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1990-2002, All Rights Reserved. MSC, MSC/, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Fatigue, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Laminate Modeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA. EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation. HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of UGS Corp. a Siemens Group Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners.

P3*2008R1*Z*MODL:Z:DC-REF-PDF

Main Index

Contents Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

dÉçãÉíêó=jçÇÉäáåÖ ÉêÉåÅÉ=j~åì~ä=m~ê

1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling Overview of Capabilities

2

Concepts and Definitions 4 Parameterization 4 Topology 10 Connectivity 16 Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in Patran Global Model Tolerance & Geometry 19

18

Types of Geometry in Patran 20 Trimmed Surfaces 20 Solids 24 Parametric Cubic Geometry 25 Matrix of Geometry Types Created 27 Building An Optimal Geometry Model Building a Congruent Model 31 Building Optimal Surfaces 33 Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces 38 Building B-rep Solids 41 Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids

2

31

42

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry Overview

46

Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry 47 Accessing Geometry Using Patran Unigraphics 47 Accessing Geometry Using Patran ProENGINEER 54 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

3

Coordinate Frames Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

60

57

iv Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 ==

Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

64

Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames 67

4

Create Actions Overview of Geometry Create Action

72

Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids 78 Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method) 78 Create Point ArcCenter 82 Extracting Points= 84 Interpolating Points 94 Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points 100 Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance 110 Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points 112 Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces 115 Creating Curves Between Points 120 Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method) 130 Creating Chained Curves 133 Creating Conic Curves 135 Extracting Curves From Surfaces 139 Creating Fillet Curves 145 Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points 149 Creating Curves at Intersections 151 Manifold Curves Onto a Surface 161 Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method) 168 Creating Offset Curves 171 Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces 176 Creating Piecewise Linear Curves 183 Creating Spline Curves 185 Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method) 193 Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method) 195 Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method) 199 Creating Involute Curves 203 Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids 208 Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method) 214 Creating 2D Circle Curves 222 Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves 226 Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method) 229

Main Index

CONTENTS v

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method) 237 Creating Surfaces from Curves 240 Creating Composite Surfaces 250 Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces 254 Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method) 256 Extracting Surfaces 259 Creating Fillet Surfaces 265 Matching Adjacent Surfaces 269 Creating Constant Offset Surface 271 Creating Ruled Surfaces 273 Creating Trimmed Surfaces 277 Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method) 286 Extruding Surfaces and Solids 288 Gliding Surfaces 293 Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method 297 Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method) 304 Creating Midsurfaces 306 Creating Solid Primitives 311 Creating a Solid Block 311 Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method) 327 Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid 337 Creating a Decomposed Solid 339 Creating Solids from Faces 342 Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method) 345 Gliding Solids 347 Feature Recognition (Pre-release) 350 Feature Types 350 Overview of the Feature Recognition Modules 350 Feature Recognition 352 Edit Hole Feature 358 Edit Hole Feature using Radius Constraint= 361 Edit Blend Feature 364 Edit Blend Feature using Radius Constraint= 367 Edit Chamfer Feature 370 Edit Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint= 373 Edit Feature Parameters 376 Show Hole Feature 377 Show Hole Feature using Radius Constraint= 378 Show Blend Feature 379 Show Blend Feature using Radius Constraint= 380 Show Chamfer Feature 381 Show Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint= 382

Main Index

vi Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 ==

Show Feature Information 383 Delete Hole Feature 384 Delete Hole Feature using Radius Constraint= 385 Delete Blend Feature 386 Delete Blend Feature using Radius Constraint= 387 Delete Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint= 388 Delete Chamfer Feature 389 Delete Any Feature 390 Clear Feature 391 Creating Coordinate Frames 393 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method 393 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method 395 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method 397 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method 401 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method 404 Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method 405 Creating Planes 407 Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method 407 Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method 408 Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method 410 Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method 414 Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method 415 Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method 418 Creating Planes with the Offset Method 424 Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method 426 Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method 430 Creating Vectors 433 Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method 433 Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method 434 Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method 436 Creating Vectors with the Normal Method 438 Creating Vectors with the Product Method 445 Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method 447 Creating P-Shapes Rectangle 450 Quadrilateral 450 Triangle 451 Disc 452 Cylinder 453 Cone 454 Sphere 455

Main Index

450

CONTENTS vii

Paraboloid 456 Five-Sided Box 457 Six-Sided Box 458 Edit P-Shapes

5

460

Delete Actions Overview of the Geometry Delete Action Deleting Any Geometric Entity

462

463

Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors Deleting Coordinate Frames

6

466

Edit Actions Overview of the Edit Action Methods Editing Points 472 Equivalencing Points 472 Editing Curves 474 Breaking Curves 474 Blending a Curve 484 Disassembling a Chained Curve Extending Curves 490 Merging Existing Curves 504 Refitting Existing Curves 508 Reversing a Curve 510 Trimming Curves 513

487

Editing Surfaces 520 Surface Break Options 520 Blending Surfaces 538 Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces 541 Editing Edges from Surfaces 544 Matching Surface Edges 548 Extending Surfaces 553 Refitting Surfaces 568 Reversing Surfaces 570 Sewing Surfaces 572 Subtracting Surfaces 574 Trimming Surfaces to an Edge 575

Main Index

470

464

viii Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 ==

Adding a Fillet to a Surface= 577 Adding a Hole to Surfaces 578 Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces Adding a Vertex to Surfaces 586 Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces

584 588

Editing Solids 591 Breaking Solids 591 Blending Solids 607 Disassembling B-rep Solids 610 Refitting Solids 613 Reversing Solids 618 Solid Boolean Operation Add 619 Solid Boolean Operation Subtract 621 Solid Boolean Operation Intersect 623 Creating Solid Edge Blends 625 Imprinting Solid on Solid 629 Solid Shell Operation 631 Editing Features 634 Suppressing a Feature 634 Unsuppressing a Feature 635 Editing Feature Parameters 636 Feature Parameter Definition 637

7

Show Actions Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods The Show Action Information Form 641 Showing Points 642 Showing Point Locations

642

Showing Point Distance 644 Showing the Nodes on a Point 658 Showing Curves 660 Showing Curve Attributes 660 Showing Curve Arc 661 Showing Curve Angle 663 Showing Curve Length Range 665 Showing the Nodes on a Curve 667 Showing Surfaces 669 Showing Surface Attributes

Main Index

669

640

CONTENTS ix

Showing Surface Area Range 671 Showing the Nodes on a Surface 672 Showing Surface Normals 674 Showing Solids 677 Showing Solid Attributes

677

Showing Coordinate Frames 679 Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes

679

Showing Planes 681 Showing Plane Attributes 681 Showing Plane Angle 682 Showing Plane Distance 684 Showing Vectors 686 Showing Vector Attributes

8

686

Transform Actions Overview of the Transform Methods

688

Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 691 Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 691 Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 705 Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors 715 Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 726 Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method) 734 Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 742 Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 751 Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids 761 Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids 770 Transforming Coordinate Frames 779 Translating Coordinate Frames 779 Rotating Coordinate Frames 782

9

Verify Actions Verify Action 788 Verifying Surface Boundaries Verifying Surfaces for B-reps

Main Index

788 790

x Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 ==

Verify =- Surface (Duplicates)

10

792

Associate Actions Overview of the Associate Action Associating Point Object 797 Associating Curve Object 799

11

796

Disassociate Actions Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods Disassociating Points 803 Disassociating Curves 804 Disassociating Surfaces 804

12

The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry Introduction

808

Renumber Forms 809 Renumber Geometry 810

Main Index

802

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

1

Main Index

Introduction to Geometry Modeling 

Overview of Capabilities



Concepts and Definitions



Types of Geometry in Patran



Building An Optimal Geometry Model

2 4 20 31

2 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Capabilities

Overview of Capabilities A powerful and important feature of Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be: • Created. • Directly accessed from an external CAD part file. • Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.

Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry Patran maintains complete accuracy of the original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions. This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the Patran database. Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities: Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry All loads, boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, Patran will automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements. Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh, the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties are automatically reassigned. For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the Patran Reference Manual. Direct Geometry Access Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access (or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems: • EDS/Unigraphics • Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology • CATIA by Dassault Systemes

With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly to the geometry.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 3 Overview of Capabilities

For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47. Import and Export of Geometry There are three file formats available to import or export geometry: • IGES • PATRAN 2 Neutral File • Express Neutral File

In using any of the file formats, Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained. For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File, and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry. Patran Native Geometry You can also create geometry in Patran (“native” geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as well as methods to verify, delete and show information. Patran’s native geometry consists of: • Points • Parametric curves • Bi-parametric surfaces • Tri-parametric solids • Boundary represented (B-rep) solids

All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior (except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces). Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties directly to the geometric entity. Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior locations on the geometric entity.

Main Index

4 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Concepts and Definitions There are many functions in Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the geometry. These functions are: • Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid. • Creating a field function in parametric space. • Meshing a curve, surface or solid. • Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.

For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various Patran functions. The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model. The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal geometry model for analysis.

Parameterization All Patran geometry are labeled one of the following: • Point (0-Dimensions) • Curve (1-Dimension) • Surface (2-Dimensions) • Solid (3-Dimensions)

Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 , ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”. Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 . An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an If X Z X ( t ) and Y Z Y ( t ) , as t changes, does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , surface and solid.

X ,Y

location as a function of time, t t.

X

and Y will define a path. Parameterization of geometry ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various points on the curve,

The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in Patran. Point A Point in Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ space.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 5 Concepts and Definitions

Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not parameterized.

Figure 1-1

Point in Patran

Curve A Curve in Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space. Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ) , from one-dimensional parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3. A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given point, along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 The parameter, endpoint V 2 .

Main Index

P,

Curve in Patran ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 Z 0 , P

is at endpoint

V1

and at

ξ1 Z 1 , P

is at

6 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

A straight curve can be defined as: P Z ( 1.0 Ó ξ 1 )V 1 H ξ 1 V 2

Figure 1-3

(1-1)

Mapping Function Phi for a Curve

(1-1) of our straight curve can be represented as: Φ ξ 1 Z ( 1.0 Ó ξ 1 ) V1 H ξ 1 V 2

The derivative of

Φ (ξ1)

(1-2)

in (1-2), would give us (1-3) which is the tangent of the straight curve.

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ1 Z V 2 Ó V 1

(1-3)

Because the curve is straight, ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 , also defines a vector for

For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be found. (The vector, ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 , usually will not have a length of one.) Surface A surface in Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.

Main Index

P,

on the surface,

P

can be located

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 7 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-4

Surface in Patran

A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges. For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces, 20. Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of ξ 2 Z 0 , P is at V 1 and at ξ 1 Z 1 , ξ 2 Z 1 , P is at V 3 . A surface is represented by a mapping function, global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Main Index

Φ ( ξ 1 Iξ 2 ) ,

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1

and

0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 .

Thus, at

ξ1 Z 0 ,

which maps the parametric space into the

8 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-5

Mapping Function Phi for a Surface

The first order derivatives of

Φ ( ξ 1 Iξ 2 )

results in two partial derivatives,

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ1

and

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ2 :

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 Z T ξ1 and ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 2 Z T ξ 2

where

Tξ 1

is the tangent vector in the

At any point for a given surface, directions can be determined.

Tξ 1

ξ1

and

(1-4) direction and Tξ 2

Tξ 2

is the tangent vector in the

ξ2

which define the tangents and the positive

direction. ξ1

and

ξ2

Usually T ξ 1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and they are not perpendicular to each other. Solid A solid in Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A solid has three parameters,

Main Index

located by

ξ1 , ξ2 ,

Note:

Note:

and

ξ3 ,

ξ1 , ξ2 ,

and

ξ3 ,

where at any given point,

P,

within the solid,

P

can be

as shown in Figure 1-6.

The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. Patran can also create or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not within the interior. See B-rep Solid, for more information.

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 9 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-6

Solid in Patran

A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.) The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and and at (1,1,1), P is at V 7 .

ξ3

have ranges of

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 ,

A solid can be represented by a mapping function, global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.

Main Index

and

0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1 .

At (0,0,0)

P

is at

V1

Φ ( ξ 1 Iξ 2 Iξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric space into the

10 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-7

Mapping Function Phi for a Solid

If we take the first order derivatives of ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 3 , shown in (1-5):

Φ ( ξ 1 Iξ 2 Iξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 , ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 2

∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 1 Z T ξ 1 , ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 2 Z T ξ2 , ∂ Φ ⁄ ∂ ξ 3 Z T ξ 3

(1-5)

Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction. At any point within a given solid, directions can be determined.

Tξ 1 , Tξ 2

and

and

Tξ 2

is the tangent vector in the

ξ2

direction, and

T ξ 3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 , ξ 2

Tξ 3

and

ξ3

Topology Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric entities. Every curve, surface and solid in Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this include: • Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 11 Concepts and Definitions

• Meshing an edge or a face of a solid. • Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.

Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but topologically, they can be identical. To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they are different, but topologically they are the same.

Figure 1-8

Topologically Equivalent Surfaces

Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body The types of topologic entities found in Patran are the following:

Main Index

12 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Vertex

Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.

Edge

Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.

Face

Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface, although a surface can exist on a face.

Body

A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a B-rep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See Solids, 24 for more information.

Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in Patran The connectivity for a curve, surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin. Important:Generally, when modeling in Patran, you do not need to know the topologic entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form. Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal vertex, edge

and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices, edges and faces will also change.

Figure 1-9

Main Index

Vertex & Edge Numbering for a Surface

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 13 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-10

Face Numbering for a Solid

For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as: Surface 11.3 The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as: Surface 11.3.1 V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11. The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1 The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1.3 ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100. The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as: Solid 100.1.2.2 V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100. Topological Congruency and Meshing When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, Patran requires the geometry be topologically congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries.

Main Index

14 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1 through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as common vertices.

There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a Congruent Model for more information.

Figure 1-11

Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces

For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share common edges, as well as common vertices. (MSC.Software Corporation’s Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.) Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces Another type of topological incongruence is shown in Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created along both sides of the gap.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 15 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-12

Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap

MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps: • Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces. • Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges.

For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the Patran Reference Manual. Non-manifold Topology Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.

Main Index

16 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-13

Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold). In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in Patran. The exception is in the creation of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries option detects nonmanifold edges as well as free edges.

Connectivity In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization, the axes for the parameters, have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and solid. Depending on the orientation and location of the for the curve, surface or solid.

ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3

ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 ,

axes, this defines a unique connectivity

For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 17 Concepts and Definitions

Figure 1-14

Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve

For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different for each surface.)

Figure 1-15

Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface

For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions in Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-16.

Figure 1-16

Main Index

Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid

18 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Concepts and Definitions

Plotting the Parametric Axes Patran can plot the location and orientation of the parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See Preferences>Geometry (p. 459) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information. Modifying the Connectivity For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods. For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the Patran Convention button or the PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.

Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in Patran The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element analysis model in the following ways: Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs The parameterization and connectivity for a curve, surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. Patran stores these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in Patran for more information. Defines Positive Surface Normals Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See Building An Optimal Geometry Model for more information. Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions The parameterization and connectivity of a curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural LBCs Sets (p. 27) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information. Helps Define Parametric Field Functions If you reference a field function that was defined in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 210) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 19 Concepts and Definitions

Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh The Patran mapped mesher, IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 13) in the Reference Manual - Part III for more information.

Global Model Tolerance & Geometry Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry. The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is 0.005. When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then Patran will only create the first point and not the second. This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves, surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve, surface or solid will be created, and not the second. Important:For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model dimension. For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 68) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

20 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Types of Geometry in Patran Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in Patran:1 • Point (default color is cyan) • Parametric Curve (default color is yellow) • Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green) • Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)

Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces and Solids for more information. You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry for more information. For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry Types Created.

Trimmed Surfaces Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral file; and they can be created in Patran. Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges, and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts. Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface. You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in Patran:2 • General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta) • Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green) • Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta) • Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)

(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric surface.)

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

2

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 21 Types of Geometry in Patran

Important:Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 13) in the Reference Manual - Part III for more information. Also note that some geometric operations are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid. General Trimmed Surface A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves.) An example is shown in Figure 1-17. All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of magenta.1

Figure 1-17 1

Main Index

General Trimmed Surface

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

22 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Simply Trimmed Surface A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges degenerating to a zero length edge.) Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves. All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of green. 1

Figure 1-18

Simply Trimmed Surface

Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for analysis. Composite Trimmed Surface The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface is similar to evaluations on the Patran trim surface 1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 23 Types of Geometry in Patran

(General Trimmed Surface). The big difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces. The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of determining where and when to move from one surface to another. APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface. It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears. STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface. Step 1

Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a Patran curve chain entity.

Step 2

Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create more than one composite trimmed surface. Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every 120 degrees of rotation.

Step 3

Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.

RULES: 1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur. 2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain.

Main Index

24 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface The only difference between an Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.

Solids There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in Patran:1 • Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue) • B-rep Solid (default color is white) • Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)

on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method. Tri-Parametric Solid All solids in Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes. Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh. Note:

IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 14) in the Reference Manual - Part III.

B-rep Solid A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19. The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces. B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid on using the form.

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 25 Types of Geometry in Patran

Figure 1-19

B-rep Solid in Patran

B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 14) in the Reference Manual - Part III for more information.

Parametric Cubic Geometry Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic geometry is supported in Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import and export. You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and tri-parametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most Geometry application forms. Note:

Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to create parametric cubic geometry.

Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in Patran, which are referred to as “grids”, “lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.” Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation: 3

2

Z ( ξ 1 ) Z S 1 ξ 1 H S2 ξ 1 H S3 ξ 1 H S4

where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

(1-6) S1 , S2 , S3 ,

and

S4

26 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry. Limits on Types of Curvature There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20). (1-7) and (1-8) below represent the first and second derivatives of (1-6): 2

Z′ ( ξ 1 ) Z 3 S 1 ξ 1 H 2S 2 ξ 1 H S 3

(1-7)

Z″ ( ξ 1 ) Z 6 S 1 ξ 1 H 2 S 2

(1-8)

(1-7) shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and (1-8) shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.

Figure 1-20

Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature

Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the arc decreases. Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees.

When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you. For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the true arc length.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 27 Types of Geometry in Patran

For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc lengths should be 30 degrees or less.

Figure 1-21

Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc

Matrix of Geometry Types Created All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms: • Point • Curve • Surface • Solid • Plane • Vector • Coordinate Frame

Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface and triparametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action. Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing the PATRAN 2

Main Index

28 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.) For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create Action and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods. Table 1-1

Types of Curves Created in Patran

Create or Edit Method

Main Index

Type of Curve

PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic)

XYZ

Parametric Cubic

Not Applicable

Arc3Point

Arc

Yes

2D Arc2Point

Arc

Yes

2D Arc3Point

Arc

Yes

2D Circle

Circle

Yes

Conic

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Extract

Curve On Surface

Yes

Fillet

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Fit

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Intersect

PieceWise Cubic Polynomial

Yes

Involute

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Normal

Parametric Cubic

N/A

2D Normal

Parametric Cubic

N/A

2D ArcAngles

Arc

Yes

Point

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Project

Curve On Surface

Yes

PWL

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Revolve

Arc

Yes

Spline, Loft Spline option

PieceWise Cubic Polynomial

Yes

Spline, B-Spline option

PieceWise Rational Polynomial

Yes

Spline, B-Spline option

NURB*

Yes

TanCurve

Parametric Cubic

N/A

TanPoint

Parametric Cubic

N/A

Chain

Composite Curve

No

Manifold

Curve On Surface

Yes

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 29 Types of Geometry in Patran

*NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu. This is true whether you create the spline in Patran or if you import the spline from an IGES file. See Preferences>Geometry (p. 459) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead. Table 1-2

Types of Surfaces Created in Patran

Create or Edit Method XYZ

Parametric Bi-Cubic

Not Applicable

Curve

Curve Interpolating Surface

Yes

Decompose

Trimmed Surface

Yes

Edge

Generalized Coons Surface

Yes

Extract

Surface On Solid

Yes

Extrude

Extruded Surface

Yes

Fillet

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Glide

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Match

Parametric Bi-Cubic

N/A

Normal

Sweep Normal Surface

N/A

Revolve

Surface of Revolution

Yes

bordered

Ruled Surface

No

Vertex

Curve Interpolating Surface

Yes

Trimmed (Surface Option)

Trimmed Surface

No

Trimmed (Planar Option)

Trimmed Surface

No

Trimmed (Composite Option)

Composite Trimmed Surface

No

Table 1-3

Types of Solids Created in Patran

Create or Edit Method

Main Index

Type of Surface

PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic)

Type of Solid

PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic)

XYZ

Parametric Tri-Cubic

Not Applicable

Extrude

Extruded Solid

Yes

Face

Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face

Yes

Glide

Glide Solid

Yes

Normal

Sweep Normal Solid

Yes

30 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Types of Geometry in Patran

Table 1-3

Types of Solids Created in Patran

Create or Edit Method

Main Index

Type of Solid

PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic)

Revolve

Solid of Revolution

Yes

Surface

Surface Interpolating Solid

Yes

Vertex

Parametric Tri-Cubic

N/A

B-rep

Ordinary Body

No

Decompose

Tri-Parametric

Yes

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 31 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Building An Optimal Geometry Model A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it impossible to build or complete the analysis model. In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed surface or B-rep solid. The following sections will explain how to: • Build a congruent model. • Verify and align surface normals. • Build trimmed surfaces. • Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces. • Build a B-rep solid. • Build degenerate surfaces or solids.

Building a Congruent Model Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing for more information. For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with Isomesh or Paver, Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by surfaces 1, 2 and 3.

Figure 1-22

Incongruent Set of Surfaces

To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:

Main Index

32 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

•

Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching Surface Edges on using the form.

• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options on using the

form. The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form. To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown in Figure 1-23:

Figure 1-23

Congruent Set of Surfaces

The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 33 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

u Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Break

Option:

Point Pressing this button will delete surface 1, after the break.

Delete Original Surfaces Surface List:

Surface 1

Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1.

Break Point List

Point 10

Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10, as shown in Figure 1-24.

Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Figure 1-24

Cursor Locations for Surface Break

Building Optimal Surfaces Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element analysis model of the design or mechanical part. Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model.

Main Index

34 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Avoiding Sharp Corners In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more. The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be. Note:

You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual.

For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element analysis code.

Figure 1-25

Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners

Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse Patran can determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 35 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Figure 1-26

Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces

Important:In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces in a model. The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and the element connectivity. Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces on using the form. Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals For example, Figure 1-27 shows a group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:

Main Index

36 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

u Geometry Action:

Edit

Object:

Surface

Method:

Reverse

Surface List

Surface 1:8

Draw Normal Vectors

Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8. And do not press Apply. Apply will reverse the normals.

Figure 1-27

Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals

You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors, as shown in Figure 1-28.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 37 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Figure 1-28

Surface Normal Vectors

Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4: Surface List

Surface 1:4 -Apply-

Draw Normal Vectors

Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.

Figure 1-29

Main Index

Aligned Surface Normal Vectors

This will plot the upda directions.

38 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface into a series of three or four sided surfaces. One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh. To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 254 on using the form.

When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the bottom of the screen will show the following icons: Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used or a point will be projected onto the surface. Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on the surface, it will be projected onto the surface. Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface.

Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface.

Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface.

Main Index

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 39 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Example Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface 4 into four four-sided

surfaces.

Figure 1-30

Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed

Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

Main Index

40 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Figure 1-31

Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4

Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

Figure 1-32

Main Index

Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 41 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Preferences>Geometry (p. 459) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information.

Building B-rep Solids Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 337 for more information on the form. There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in Patran: 1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume. 2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share a common edge. 3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body. This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied. B-rep solids created in Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh. Important:At this time, Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and no interior shells.

Figure 1-33

Main Index

Surface Normals for B-rep Solid

42 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively). The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid. Important:IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids. Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) There are two ways you can create a degenerate, three-sided surface: • Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method) on using the form. • Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves on using the form. Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.

Figure 1-34

Main Index

Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve

Chapter 1: Introduction to Geometry Modeling 43 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Building a Degenerate Solid

Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron) A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as shown in Figure 1-35. Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron) A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using: • The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces on using the

form. • The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method) on using the form. Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the pentahedron and

a wedge.

Figure 1-35

Main Index

Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

44 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

Main Index

Figure 1-36

Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

Figure 1-37

Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

2

Main Index

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 

Overview



Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry



PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

46 47 57

46 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview

Overview Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. Patran can export (or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file. Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the Patran main form. Geometry can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus. For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see File>Import, 73 and File>Export (p. 192) in the Patran Reference Manual.

For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47. For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57.

For more information on which IGES entities are supported by Patran for importing and exporting, see IGES Entities Supported for Import, 103 and Geometric Entity Types and their Supported IGES Equivalents (p. 201) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 47 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD systems that are listed in Table 2-1. This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry. You can execute a specific Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models menus on the main form. See File>Import (p. 73) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information. For more information on using Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 134) in the Patran Reference Manual. For more information on using Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 145) in the Patran Reference Manual. Table 2-1

Supported CAD Systems and Their Patran CAD Access Modules Supported CAD System

Patran CAD Access Module *

EDS/Unigraphics

Patran Unigraphics

Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology

Patran ProENGINEER

CATIA by Dassault Systemes Patran CATIA *Each Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appropriate external CAD file. You can find out which Patran products are currently licensed by pressing the

MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and then pressing the License button on the form that appears. Accessing Geometry Using Patran Unigraphics If Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external EDS/Unigraphics part file. Features of Patran Unigraphics • Unigraphics part file can be accessed in Patran using one of two methods. The first method is

express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored in a Patran database. • Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any

approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the direct parasolid method. • CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined EDS/Unigraphics

entity types, levels, and layers.

Main Index

48 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

• You can automatically create Patran groups when accessing the geometry based on the defined

entity types, levels, or layers. For more information on using Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 145) in the Patran Reference Manual. Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import

1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see Topological Congruency and Meshing, 13. Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices, and that there are no gaps between the faces. You can improve Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the Patran Import form and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “Bounded-Plane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option, the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then select to only those layers in the Patran Import form before importing the part. Make sure the Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is 0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some models.

Figure 2-1

Main Index

Topologically Congruent Surfaces for Patran Unigraphics

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 49 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry This section provides helpful hints and recommendations regarding the usage of Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration. Solid Geometry Guidelines Disassembling Solids

The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex meshing. This command will convert all 4sided B-rep Solid faces into simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct tri-parametric solids.

Solids Break

If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid: 1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble). 2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue with the break operation. 3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful: • Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)). If this

operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit) before the break operation. • Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose the

individual solid volumes. • Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the B-rep can

not be created due to surface gaps, use Edit/Surface/Sew and try again.

Main Index

Global Model Tolerance

After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended tolerance for Patran applications to use for best results.

Solids Group Transform

Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about transforming solids in pre-release format, see , 50.

50 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Meshing Guidelines Hybrid TetMesher Global Edge Lengths

The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease the global edge length.

Hybrid TetMesher Mesh Control

The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing, follow these steps: • Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds. • Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular elements which

completely enclose the desired geometric volume. • Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular elements as

input. Paver

If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making congruent meshes: • Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry. • Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit. • Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue. • Mesh again.

Main Index

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 51 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines Solids - Group Transform

Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the desired geometry in Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable before executing Patran. At the system prompt, type: setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1 which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as planned. If not, either: • Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element mesh, with

the limitation being that element properties and loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the finite elements; or • Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that result from

the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep. • Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the Express

Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a transformation of the geometry is supported.

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Surface Congruency Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency. Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore, geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent. It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in Unigraphics prior to access by Patran. Patran offers the ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies. Unigraphics Sew With Verify During Geometry Access

Main Index

“Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful. The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.

52 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Problem Patran detects three different types of anomalies during Unigraphics part file Unigraphics Entities import: From Import a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be replaced. As such, Patran will not attempt to include these surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these surfaces be refitted once imported into Patran. You will find these surfaces in a group named, <model_name>_UG_SUSPECT. b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model, Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing and Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks, 53 for steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into Patran. If UG sewing is turned on for the Patran import, there is a chance that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be brought into Patran and put into a group named, <model_name>_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend you first commit/save the Patran database and then reconstruct these bodies if possible. c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group named, <model_name>_GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the model.

Main Index

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 53 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Unigraphics Model Checks

Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you use this on surfaces and any are illdefined, they will be flagged as “suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu bar. To run all checks: • Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry... • Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”. • Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.

• NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle tolerance is 0.5 units. Patran Surface Sew

In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, Patran offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the Unigraphics and Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes, after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together (Edit/Surface/Sew). The other option for sewing the model using Patran surface sewing is to increase the global tolerance in Patran and sew the model again. Changing the global tolerance in Patran is generally not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the “allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or edge match) operation. (Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of increasing it by an order of magnitude.)

Main Index

54 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Refitting Geometry

The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc. Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the Geometry application. These functions will more regularly parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this typically involves those with compound curvature), which can currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models. Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.

Edit/Surface/Refit

As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include: • Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled with

subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by using Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc. • Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,

transforming, etc. • Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for regioning).

Curves Coincident With Surface and Solid Edges

Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation: • Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when required. • If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function

Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid vertices. • Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.

Accessing Geometry Using Patran ProENGINEER If Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external Pro/ENGINEER part file. You can execute Patran ProENGINEER either from Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER by doing one of the following:

Main Index

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 55 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

Executing Patran ProENGINEER From Patran Execute Patran ProENGINEER from Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 134) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information. Executing Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER

Note:

Make sure Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following the instructions in Module and Preference Setup (Ch. 3) in the Patran Installation and Operations Guide

Execute Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following: 1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering: p3_proe p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press if you want to accept the default command pro. Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER. [pro]?: Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER menus in the following order: File Export Model Patran Geom The Patran menu will list four options: Filter Run Patran Create .db Create .geo You can select any one of the above four options. If Filter is selected: • A menu appears which allows the user to select:

Datum Points Datum Curves Datum Surfaces Datum Planes Coordinate System Datums for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities). If Run Patran is selected:

Main Index

56 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

• A Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current

Pro/ENGINEER object in memory. • Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and opened. • The Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the Pro/ENGINEER geometry

will be loaded into the Patran database, and both Pro/ENGINEER and Patran will remain executing. If Create .db is selected: • A Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current

Pro/ENGINEER object in memory. • A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:

One, execute Patran and create and open a database. Two, load the.geo file into the Patran database. And, three, close the database and exit Patran. If Create .geo is selected, a Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory. For more information on the Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 143) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

Chapter 2: Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry 57 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s Patran. With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, Patran can import or export only parametric cubic geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form. Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file. Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file. Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry. For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN 2.5 Neutral Files, 88 and Exporting to a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 192) in the Patran Reference Manual. For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry. For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in Patran, see Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 28). For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting to IGES Files (p. 201) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

58 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

Main Index

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

3

Main Index

Coordinate Frames



Coordinate Frame Definitions



Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames



Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames 67

60 64

60 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Coordinate Frame Definitions

Coordinate Frame Definitions Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames: • Rectangular (X,Y,Z) • Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z) • Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)

Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified. Each coordinate system defined in Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and 3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular, cylindrical or spherical. When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the coordinate frame’s origin. Important:Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that is, Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining

θ

and

spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 195) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Rectangular Coordinate Frame Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space.

In a rectangular frame, the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, ycoordinate and z-coordinate.

Main Index

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames 61 Coordinate Frame Definitions

Figure 3-1

Rectangular Coordinate Frame

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and z-coordinate.

Main Index

62 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Coordinate Frame Definitions

Figure 3-2

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame

Spherical Coordinate Frame Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and

P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radialcoordinate, theta-coordinate, and phi-coordinate. A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical coordinate frame. For example: If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 36) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Main Index

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames 63 Coordinate Frame Definitions

Figure 3-3

Main Index

Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition

64 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame in Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create action: • 3Point • Axis • Euler • Normal • 2Vector • View Vector

For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating Coordinate Frames. You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames. The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames. 3 Point Method Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a coordinate frame by

specifying three points:

Figure 3-4

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method

Axis Method Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by specifying a point location

at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on one of the two remaining axes.

Main Index

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames 65 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

Figure 3-5

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method

Euler Method The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order shown: 1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID. 1. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin. 1. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1. 1. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2. 1. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3. The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are made. Normal Method Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame, where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2 direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is orthogonal to axis 1 and 3.

For more information on the definition of the parametric

Main Index

ξ1

and

ξ2

axes, see Parameterization.

66 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

Figure 3-6

Main Index

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames 67 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames

Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames You can translate or scale geometry in Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors or Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors. On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle. If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.) Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the

Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

Figure 3-7

Main Index

Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

68 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames

Main Index

Figure 3-8

Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

Figure 3-9

Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

Chapter 3: Coordinate Frames 69 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames

Figure 3-10

Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <1 2 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical) coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate system. Therefore, in Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.

Main Index

70 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

4

Main Index

Create Actions



Overview of Geometry Create Action



Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids



Creating Solid Primitives



Feature Recognition (Pre-release)



Creating Coordinate Frames



Creating Planes

407



Creating Vectors

433



Creating P-Shapes



Edit P-Shapes

460

450

72

311

393

350

78

72 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Overview of Geometry Create Action Select any method to obtain detailed help. Object Point

Method • XYZ

Description • Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing

nodes or vertices. • ArcCenter

• Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.

• Extract

• Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate

location. • Interpolate

• Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that

are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart. • Intersect

• Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of

entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane. • Offset

• Creates a point on an existing curve.

• Pierce

• Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a

surface or solid face. • Project

• Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are

either projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 73 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Object Curve

Method

Description

• Point

• Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.

• Arc3Point

• Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point

locations. • Chain

• Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing

curves. Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces. • Conic

• Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and

a starting and ending points. • Extract

• Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric

coordinate location or on an edge of the surface. • Fillet

• Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing

curves or edges. • Fit

• Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on

a least squares fit. • Intersect

• Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.

• Manifold

• Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or

more point locations. • Normal

• Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face

to a point location. • Offset

• Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing

curve.

Main Index

74 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Object Curve (cont.)

Method • Project

Description • Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is

projected onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or based on the current view angle. • PWL

• Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point

locations. • Spline

• Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point

locations. • TanCurve

• Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.

• TanPoint

• Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.

• XYZ

• Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its

length and orientation. • Involute

• Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii

option. • Revolve

• Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation

axis for a defined angle. • 2D Normal

• Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or

edge and that lies within a defined plane. • 2D Circle

• Creates a circle within a defined plane.

• 2D

• Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.

ArcAngles • 2D Arc2Point • Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses

a starting, ending and center point locations. • 2D Arc3Point • Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that

passes through a starting, middle and ending point locations.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 75 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Object Surface

Method • Curve

Description • Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N

curves or edges. • Composite

• Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.

• Decompose

• Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed

surface) based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface. • Edge

• Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.

• Extract

• Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric

coordinate location or on the face of the solid. • Fillet

• Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two

existing surfaces or faces. • Match

• Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two

specified surfaces. • Offset

• Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.

• bordered

• Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or

edges. • Trimmed

• Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve

loop and optionally, an inner chained curve loop. Surface (cont.)

• Vertex

• Creates a surface from four point locations.

• XYZ

• Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines

its length and orientation. • Extrude

• Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded

through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated. • Glide

• Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or

edge, along one or more base curves or edges. • Normal

• Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.

• Revolve

• Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a

rotation axis for a defined angle. • Mesh

• Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).

• P-Shape

• Creates a surface (rectangle, triangle, cyclinder, sphere, six-sided

box, quadrilateral, disk, cone, paraboloid, or five-sided box) with user input.

Main Index

76 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Object Solid

Method • Primitive

Description • Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user

input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool solid. • Surface

• Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or

faces. • B-rep

• Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a

closed volume. • Decompose

• Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four

vertex locations on each face. • Face

• Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.

• Vertex

• Creates solids from eight point locations.

• XYZ

• Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its

length and orientation. • Extrude

• Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded

through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated. • Glide

• Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or

edge, along one or more base surfaces or faces. • Normal

• Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.

• Revolve

• Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation

axis for a defined angle. Coord

• 3Point

• Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame

based on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point on Plane 1-3. • Axis

• Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame

based on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1 • Euler

• Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame

based on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3. • Normal

• Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame

whose Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is at a point location.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 77 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Object Plane

Method • Vector

Normal • Curve

Description • Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a

specified direction as the plane normal. • Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve

Normal

as the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane normal.

• Interpolate

• Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as

the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane normals. • Least Squares • Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more

specified non-colinear points. • Offset

• Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified

offset distance. • Surface

• Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified

Tangent

surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as the plane normal.

• 3 Points

• Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane

origin is located at the first point. Vector

• Point-Vector

• Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

• Magnitude

• Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector

direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector. • Intersect

• Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes.

The vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that intersecting line. • Normal

• Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane

and the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane. • Product

• Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors

and has its base point located at the base point of the first vector. • 2 Point

• Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing

to a specified tip point.

Main Index

78 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method) The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or other point location as provided in the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 79 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Point XYZ Method Example

Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.

Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point 5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined.

Main Index

80 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example

Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 81 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example

Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.

Main Index

82 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Create Point ArcCenter The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which have a nonzero center/radius of curvature.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 83 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Point ArcCenter Method Example

Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc.

Main Index

84 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Points Extracting Points from Curves and Edges Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .

Main Index

ξ1

coordinate location of the curve

Chapter 4: Create Actions 85 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Extract Method Example

Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.

Main Index

ξ1(u)

is equal to 0.75, on

86 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Extract Method Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at the edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

ξ1(u)

is equal to 0.75, on

Chapter 4: Create Actions 87 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location on the surface.

Main Index

88 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 89 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a diagonal of two points.

Main Index

90 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example

Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 91 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal.

Main Index

92 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example

Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, vmin=0.333, and v-max=0.666.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 93 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface

Main Index

94 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Interpolating Points Between Two Points The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 95 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example

Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.

Main Index

96 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example

Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes 1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 97 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Interpolating Points on a Curve The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.

Main Index

98 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 99 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example

Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option.

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example

Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

100 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane. One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, Patran will create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 101 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Preferences Commands (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example

Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

102 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 103 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves.

Main Index

104 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example

Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with Surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 105 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with Plane 1.

Main Index

106 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with Curve 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 107 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example

Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector and the Curve.

Main Index

108 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example

Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and Surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 109 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example

Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1.

Main Index

110 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space distance from an existing point on the same curve.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 111 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Preferences Commands (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual Point Offset Method Example

Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset.

Main Index

112 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face. If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, Patran will create a point at each intersection.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 113 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Point Pierce Method Example

Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects Surface 1.

Main Index

114 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Pierce Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and 14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 115 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

116 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 117 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • The Viewing Menu (Ch. 7) in the Patran Reference Manual Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16, 18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is pressed in.

Main Index

118 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 119 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted.

Main Index

120 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves Between Points Creating Curves Through 2 Points The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 121 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10.

Main Index

122 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves Through 3 Points The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 Z 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 Z 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 123 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example

Main Index

124 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and 2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at instead of 0.5.

Main Index

ξ1(u)

=0.75,

Chapter 4: Create Actions 125 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves Through 4 Points The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 Z 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 Z 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

126 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 127 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and 3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667.

Main Index

128 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25 and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 129 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form

This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option.

Main Index

130 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual

Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method) The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point locations. Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 131 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Arc3Point Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1 through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4.

Main Index

132 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Arc3Point Method Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are specified with point coordinate locations.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 133 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Chained Curves The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges. The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the Create/Surface/Trimmed form.

Main Index

134 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Trimmed Surfaces • Creating Trimmed Surfaces • Disassembling a Chained Curve Curve Chain Method Example

Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10. Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 135 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Conic Curves The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is, hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

136 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 137 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Conic Method Example

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50.

Main Index

138 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Conic Method Example

This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from 0.50 for Curve 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 139 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Curves From Surfaces Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .

Main Index

140 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 141 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2 at

ξ2(v)

= 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed.

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75.

Main Index

ξ1(u)

= 0.75, instead

142 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) Z 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface 1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 143 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces.

Main Index

144 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges of Surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 145 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Fillet Curves The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc. For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran 2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves.

Main Index

146 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 147 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve Fillet Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Main Index

148 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Fillet Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 149 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point locations. Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

150 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve Fit Method Example

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created through Points 1 through 6.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 151 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves at Intersections Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other.

Main Index

152 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 153 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create Surface 2.

Main Index

154 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 155 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect each other.

Main Index

156 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 157 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

158 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 159 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created

Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes.

Main Index

160 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example

Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 161 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Manifold Curves Onto a Surface Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

162 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 163 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

• Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8.

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5 and 12.

Main Index

164 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 165 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1 through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4.

Main Index

166 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 167 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application form.

Main Index

168 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created

Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method) The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 169 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve Normal Method Example

Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally to the edge of Curve 5.

Main Index

170 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 171 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Offset Curves Creating Constant Offset Curve This form is used to create a constant offset curve.

Main Index

172 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Creating Constant Offset Curve Example

Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 173 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Variable Offset Curve This form is used to create a variable offset curve.

Main Index

174 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types; Arc Length and Parameter Value.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 175 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Variable Offset Curve Example

Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1. Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0.

Main Index

176 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined projection vector, onto a surface or solid face.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 177 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Available options are: Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that define a plane. Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in Surface List. Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition. View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the current viewport. Patran will project the existing points using the normal direction of the screen.

Main Index

178 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • The Viewing Menu (Ch. 7) in the Patran Reference Manual Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example

Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 179 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example

Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted.

Main Index

180 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example

Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 181 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example

Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted.

Main Index

182 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Project Parameters Subordinate Form The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Project application form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 183 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created

Creating Piecewise Linear Curves The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

184 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve PWL Method Example

Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 185 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Spline Curves Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

186 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 187 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

• Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in, Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled.

Main Index

188 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 189 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

190 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 191 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1 through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the points.

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three, instead of five.

Main Index

192 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3 is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 193 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method) The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else Patran will not be able to find the tangent location on each curve.

Main Index

194 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve TanCurve Method Example

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9 and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 195 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method) The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else Patran will not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

196 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 197 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Curve TanPoint Method Example

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed.

Main Index

198 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve TanPoint Method Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and an edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 199 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method) The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Main Index

200 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Curve XYZ Method Example

Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 201 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface XYZ Method Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>.

Main Index

202 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid XYZ Method Example

Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 203 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Involute Curves Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle.

Main Index

204 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 205 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example

Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13.

Main Index

206 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin and the radius of the stop of the curve.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 207 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example

Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13.

Main Index

208 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can be surfaces or solid faces.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 209 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Curve Revolve Method Example

Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees.

Main Index

210 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Revolve Method Example

Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 211 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Revolve Method Example

Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees.

Main Index

212 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid Revolve Method

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation of 90 degrees.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 213 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid Revolve Method

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1 about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees.

Main Index

214 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method) Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 215 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

216 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Connectivity • Topology Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and its starting point is near Point 3.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 217 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed.

Main Index

218 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 219 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

220 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Connectivity • Topology Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a point that is closest to Point 6.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 221 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts from a point that is closest to Point 3.

Main Index

222 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating 2D Circle Curves The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 223 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

224 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 0.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 225 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Main Index

226 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be input.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 227 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

228 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example

Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 229 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method) Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points.

Main Index

230 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 231 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Main Index

232 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 233 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points.

Main Index

234 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 235 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end points and in the Z construction plane.

Main Index

236 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 237 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method) The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

238 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 239 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created.

Main Index

240 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces from Curves Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges. Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) for more information.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 241 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves 5 and 6.

Main Index

242 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface 1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 243 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing curves or edges.

Main Index

244 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5, 6 and 8.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 245 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

246 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing curves or edges.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 247 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Curve Method With 4 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

248 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method) The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of curves or edges.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 249 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10.

Main Index

250 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Composite Surfaces

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 251 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Figure 4-1

The Composite method creates surfaces composed from multiple surfaces.

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Trimmed Surfaces • Matrix of Geometry Types Created

Main Index

252 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

General Comments

If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”. The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be represented by multiple composite surfaces. If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and cleanup tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the Options form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 253 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Composite Surface Options

Surface Composite Method Example

Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport.

Main Index

254 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric solid. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces for more information on how to use the Decompose method.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 255 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Trimmed Surfaces • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Decompose Method Example

Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface Vertex databoxes on the form.

Main Index

256 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method) The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 257 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle).

Main Index

258 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example

Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5 through 8.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 259 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Surfaces Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and

Main Index

ξ3

has a range of

0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1 .

One surface is extracted from each solid.

260 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 261 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25 • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Connectivity • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19.

Main Index

ξ 3 ( w ) Z 0.75

262 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at ξ 3 ( w ) Z 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu icons listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 263 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is extracted from each solid face.

Main Index

264 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example

Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two faces of Solid 10.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 265 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Fillet Surfaces The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be created.

Main Index

266 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 267 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Surface Fillet Method Example

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5.

Main Index

268 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Fillet Method Example

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 269 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Matching Adjacent Surfaces The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric orientations. Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing for more information. You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See Matching Surface Edges for more information.

Main Index

270 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 13) in the Reference Manual - Part III Surface Match Method Example

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 271 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Constant Offset Surface This form is used to create a constant offset surface.

Main Index

272 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Creating Constant Offset Surface Example

Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and reversing the direction vector of surface 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 273 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Ruled Surfaces The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges.

Main Index

274 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 275 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 13) in the Reference Manual - Part III • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual Surface Ruled Method Example

Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2.

Main Index

276 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Ruled Method Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric

Main Index

ξ1

direction is the same as for Curve 5.

Chapter 4: Create Actions 277 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Trimmed Surfaces The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be meshed by Paver.

Main Index

278 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 279 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Creating Chained Curves • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 13) in the Reference Manual - Part III

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted.

Main Index

280 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 281 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Auto Chain Subordinate Form The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation. This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.

Main Index

282 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 283 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Next:

Used to update the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox when multiple choices are possible, i.e. a branch.

Previous:

Quit: Used to update "Choose Curve to Continue" databox when more than two curves form a branch. Use in conjunction with the Next button.

Used to end the auto chain process without attempting to creating a chain.

Backup:

Used to backup one curve at a time in the list of curves that have been previously selected as constituents for the resulting chain.

Used to end the auto chain process and attempt to create a chain from the constituent curves. (Only necessary when pressing the Apply button did not create a chain.)

Delete:

Used to delete the curve in the "Choose Break: Curve to Continue" databox from the database.

OK:

Stop:

Used to finalize the selection on the curve echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox and continue the auto chain process.

Used to break the curve in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox.

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver. Shadow Surface Method The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy. Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only

Main Index

284 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view. The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges. During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface. Creating Composite Surfaces The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part, the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions: • More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces). • A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps or

overlaps. • An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following: • Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur. In other

words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite surface. • No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface does not

have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted holes or spikes in the geometry.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 285 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted.

Main Index

286 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method) The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 287 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Vertex Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled.

Main Index

288 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Extruding Surfaces and Solids The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 289 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

290 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • Coordinate Frame Definitions Surface Extrude Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 291 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Extrude Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale and rotation is at Point 14.

Main Index

292 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid Extrude Method Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale is at Point 21.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 293 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Gliding Surfaces Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges.

Main Index

294 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example

Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 295 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic scaling is optional.

Main Index

296 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example

Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve to glide along.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 297 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness.

Main Index

298 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 299 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Surface Normal Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 Z 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that the parametric direction is on.

Main Index

300 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Surface Normal Method Example

Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25 and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 301 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid Normal Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface databox is disabled.

Main Index

302 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 303 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Solid Normal Method From a Face Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has a thickness of 0.25.

Main Index

304 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method) The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes listboxes. Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex, then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4 appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes listbox. The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes by selecting at

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 305 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the free boundary, will be ignored. The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pull-down menu would create a better surface. Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface. To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics: • Congruent 2-D elements • Should be one connected set of elements • No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes • The outer or inner loop should not intersect.

Main Index

306 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form

Figure 4-2 Note:

When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be ignored.

Creating Midsurfaces Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 307 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Create Midsurface Automatic Example

Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall thickness is less than 8.1.

Main Index

308 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 309 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Create Midsurface Manual Example

Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid 1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from.

Main Index

310 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 311 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solid Primitives Creating a Solid Block This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block as the tool solid.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

312 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively.

Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 313 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solid Cylinder This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid.

Main Index

314 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 315 Creating Solid Primitives

Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness = 0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Main Index

316 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solid Sphere This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created sphere as the tool solid.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 317 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis.

Main Index

318 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 319 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solid Cone This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid.

Main Index

320 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0, Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 321 Creating Solid Primitives

Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.

Main Index

322 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solid Torus This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 323 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis.

Main Index

324 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 325 Creating Solid Primitives

Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.

Main Index

326 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

More Help: • Topology • Connectivity • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 327 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method) Creating Solids from Two Surfaces The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces.

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2 and 3.

Main Index

328 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 329 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method) The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing surfaces or solid faces.

Main Index

330 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 331 Creating Solid Primitives

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Surface Method With 3 Surface Option Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

332 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method) The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing surfaces or solid faces.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 333 Creating Solid Primitives

Main Index

334 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

More Help: • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Surface Method With 4 Surface Option Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 335 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids with the N Surface Option The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of existing surfaces or solid faces.

Main Index

336 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Display>Geometry (p. 377) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example

Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 337 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids, 347.

Main Index

338 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • B-rep Solid • Building B-rep Solids Solid B-rep Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and 8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 339 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating a Decomposed Solid The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces.

Main Index

340 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.5.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 341 Creating Solid Primitives

Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.5.

Main Index

342 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids from Faces The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 343 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Matrix of Geometry Types Created • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The option is set to 6 Face.

Main Index

344 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The option is set to 5 Face.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 345 Creating Solid Primitives

Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method) The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

346 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Solid Vertex Method Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 347 Creating Solid Primitives

Gliding Solids The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges.

Main Index

348 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Solid Primitives

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Matrix of Geometry Types Created Solid Glide Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 349 Creating Solid Primitives

Main Index

350 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Feature Recognition (Pre-release) Feature Types The Feature Recognition Tool support the following feature types: • Circular Hole features. • Transition features. • Blends • Chamfers

The Actions supported for features are: Recognize, Clear, Show, Delete, Edit The Methods supported for features are: Automatic, Interactive Feature Definition The feature has the following attributes: Name: string identifier, i.e., Hole 1 Parameters: the values defining the feature, i.e., • for holes the parameters are radius and depth • for blends the parameters are radius1 and radius2 • for chamfers the parameters are height1 and height2

Id: the internal id used for storage Label: the numeric value of the feature name; i.e., if the feature name is Hole 1, the label is 1. Automatic Recognition You select the solid list from which the features are to be recognized from the viewport and the corresponding features for which recognition was called is recognized. In case of transition features automatic recognition recognizes all the features with chaining. Interactive Recognition You can interactively pick the face (or edge for holes) list from the viewport and only those features which contain the selected faces (or edges for holes) are recognized. Single or compound/chain features can be recognized during interactive recognition.

Overview of the Feature Recognition Modules The feature recognition technology integrated in Patran is centered around two modules:

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 351 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Hole module. This module provides recognition of hole features in the input model. It recognizes circular features. It can recognize circular holes which may be blind or thru. Noncircular features like the rectangular holes, cannot be recognized with this module. Every hole feature has two associated attributes namely the radius, and depth. In case of blind holes both these attributes can be modified/edited, but in case of a thru hole only its radius can be modified/edited. During recognition phase the dependency relations between different hole features are also recognized. Subsequent operations on these features require satisfying these dependency relations. For example, if hole 2 is dependent upon hole 1 (parent child relation) then deletion of hole 1 will automatically result in deletion of hole 2. Similar relations apply for editing of dependent features. Blend/Chamfer module. This module provides recognitions of transition features namely blend features and chamfer features. Two types of blends are recognized – constant radius blends and variable radius blends. Thus each blend has two attributes namely the maximum radius and minimum radius. However in case of constant radius blends the values of these two attributes are same. Similarly a chamfer feature has two attributes which are its slope heights. Transition features such as blends and chamfers are rarely isolated, and are usually connected to other blends/chamfers to form a blend/chamfer chain. Thus automatic recognition by default recognizes blends and chamfers with chaining, whereas, interactive recognition allows features to be recognized as a single feature or a compound or chain feature. Figure below shows a blend chain.

Main Index

352 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Limitations Only one feature type per solid can be recognized and worked on at a time. For example, if you have recognized holes from one solid, then recognize blends on the same solid in the same Patran session, the feature modeler will replace the hole features with the newly recognized blend features for the solid. You can recognize holes for one solid and blends for another solid and the holes and blends will be stored in the feature modeler. All previous edits to the model by editing hole parameters or deleting holes will be saved however. Solids whose geometry source is Parasolid is the only type supported for Feature Recognition.

Feature Recognition Recognize Feature Hole Automatic Recognizes circular features from the selected Solid. It can recognize circular holes that are blind or through. The dependency relations between different holes are also recognized.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 353 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Recognize Feature Hole Interactive Recognizes circular features from the selected Solid Face or Edge . It can recognize circular holes that are blind or through. The dependency relations between different holes are also recognized.

Main Index

354 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Recognize Feature Blend Automatic Recognizes transition features such as Blend features from the selected Solid. It can recognize constant radius and variable radius blends. The dependency relations between different blends are also recognized. Automatic recognition by default recognizes blends with chaining.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 355 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Recognize Feature Blend Interactive Recognizes transition features such as Blend features from the selected Solid Face. It can recognize constant radius and variable radius blends. The dependency relations between different blends are also recognized.

Main Index

356 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Recognize Feature Chamfer Automatic Recognizes transition features such as Chamfer features from the selected Solid. The dependency relations between different chamfers are also recognized.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 357 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Recognize Feature Chamfer Interactive Recognizes transition features such as Chamfer features from the selected Solid Face. The dependency relations between different chamfers are also recognized.

Main Index

358 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Hole Feature Edit the Hole Feature Parameters. The radius and depth parameters for a blind hole or the radius of a through hole can be edited.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 359 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Hole Feature Edit the four selected holes by changing the radius values from 4 and 5 to 8.

Main Index

360 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Hole Feature

The four selected hole radii changed from values from 4 and 5 to 8.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 361 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Hole Feature using Radius Constraint Edit the Hole Feature Parameters using a Radius Constraint. The radius and depth parameters for a blind

Main Index

362 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

hole or the radius of a through hole can be edited.edited.

Edit Hole Feature Using Radius Constraint

Edit the four selected holes by changing the radius values and depth from 3 and 15 to 5 and 5 respectively.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 363 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Hole Feature Using Radius Constraint

The four selected holes radii and depths changed from 3 and 15 to 5 and 5 respectively.

Main Index

364 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Blend Feature Edit the Blend Feature Parameters. The radius R1 and radius R2 parameters for a Constant Radius or a

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 365 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Variable Radius blend can be edited.

Edit Blend Feature

Edit the four selected blends by changing the R1 and R2 radii from 4 and 4 to 3 and 6 respectively.

Main Index

366 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Blend Feature

The four selected blends R1 and R2 radii changed from 4 and 4 to 3 and 6 respectively.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 367 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Blend Feature using Radius Constraint Edit the Blend Feature Parameters using a Radius Constraint. The radius R1 and Radius R2 parameters for a Constant Radius or Variable Radius Blend can be edited.

Main Index

368 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Blend Feature Using Radius Constraint

Edit the four selected blends by changing the R1 and R2 radii from 5 and 5 to 10 and 10 respectively.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 369 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Blend Feature Using Radius Constraint

The four selected blends R1 and R2 radii changed from 5 and 5 to 10 and 10 respectively.

Main Index

370 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Chamfer Feature Edit the Chamfer Feature Parameters. The height H1 and height H2 parameters for a chamfer can be edited.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 371 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Chamfer Feature

Edit the three selected Chamfers by changing the H1 and H2 heights from 3 and 3 to 5 and 5 respectively.

Main Index

372 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Chamfer Feature

The three selected Chamfers H1 and H2 heights changed from 3 and 3 to 5 and 5 respectively.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 373 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint

Main Index

374 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit the Chamfer Feature Parameters using a Height Constraint. The height H1 and height H2 parameters for a chamfer can be edited.

Edit Chamfer Feature Using Height Constraint

Edit the three selected chamfers by changing the H1 and H2 heights from 2 and 2 to 4 and 4 respectively.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 375 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Chamfer Feature Using Height Constraint

The three selected chamfers H1 and H2 heights changed from 2 and 2 to 4 and 4 respectively.

Main Index

376 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Edit Feature Parameters The Edit Feature Parameters form allows the feature name and parameters to be displayed and modified for alteration of a model.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 377 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

When a column of the spreadsheet is selected, the value is copied to the input databox for editing. Once the value is modified, press return to update the selected column with the new parameter definition. When all the desired parameter values are modified, press the OK button to save the changes.

If the Feature Name is changed and the same name is used for multiple feature names, the feature label will be appended to the input name. For example, if you entered “test” for the name of Hole 1 and Hole 2, then the resulting name for Hole 1 will be “test” and the name for Hole 2 will be test 2.

Show Hole Feature Show the Hole Feature Parameters. The radius and depth parameters and the number of faces for each hole is displayed.

Main Index

378 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Hole Feature using Radius Constraint Show the Hole Feature Parameters using a Radius Constraint. The radius and depth parameters and the number of faces for each hole is displayed.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 379 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Blend Feature Show the Blend Feature Parameters. The radius R1 and radius R2 parameters and the number of faces for each blend is displayed.

Main Index

380 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Blend Feature using Radius Constraint Show the Blend Feature Parameters using a Radius Constraint. The radius R1 and Radius R2 parameters and the number of faces for each blend is displayed.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 381 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Chamfer Feature Show the Chamfer Feature Parameters. The height H1 and height H2 parameters and the number of faces for each chamfer is displayed.

Main Index

382 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint Show the Chamfer Feature Parameters using a Height Constraint. The height H1 and Height H2 parameters and the number of faces for each chamfer is displayed.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 383 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Show Feature Information The Show Feature Information form allows the parameters of a feature to be displayed. The spreadsheet shows the following information for each feature selected: • Feature Name • Parameter Name 1 and value • Parameter Name 2 and value • Number of Faces

Picking a spreadsheet cell will highlight the feature in the Patran secondary highlight color

Main Index

384 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Hole Feature Delete Hole Features.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 385 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Hole Feature using Radius Constraint Delete Hole Features using a Radius Constraint.

Main Index

386 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Blend Feature Delete Blend Features.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 387 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Blend Feature using Radius Constraint Delete Blend Features using a Radius Constraint.

Main Index

388 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Chamfer Feature using Height Constraint Delete Chamfer Features using a Height Constraint.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 389 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Chamfer Feature Delete Chamfer Features.

Main Index

390 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Delete Any Feature Delete any features in the model.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 391 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Clear Feature Clear features from the feature modeler derived from a solid without deleting the associated geometry.

Main Index

392 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Feature Recognition (Pre-release)

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 393 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames.

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

394 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the R-Z plane is at Point 6.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 395 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames.

Main Index

396 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 397 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames.

Main Index

398 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 399 Creating Coordinate Frames

Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example

Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14 and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis.

Main Index

400 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example

The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method. This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom on the form.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 401 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames for more information. You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu.

Main Index

402 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 403 Creating Coordinate Frames

Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example

Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face of Solid 1.

Main Index

404 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame is then created.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 405 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the graphics viewport.

Main Index

406 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Coordinate Frames

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 407 Creating Planes

Creating Planes Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Point-Vector Method Example

Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector.

Main Index

408 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 409 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Vector Normal Option Example

Creates a plane from Vector 1. The normal of the plane is parallel to the Vector.

Main Index

410 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option The Point on Curve method using the Point option creates Planes normal to a tangent vector of a point along a curve. The plane centroid will be the point location on the curve.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 411 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Point Option Example

Creates a plane whose normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 on the location where Point 3 is projected on the curve.

Main Index

412 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option The Point on Curve method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are normal to a specified curve at a parametric position along the curve. The plane centroid will be the parametric position along the curve.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 413 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Parametric Option Example

Creates a plane on Curve 1 at the specified parametric location. Its normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 at that location.

Main Index

414 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method The Plane Normal method creates a plane normal to an existing plane. The line defined by the projection of the new plane onto the existing plane is defined by selecting a vector; this vector is projected normally onto the existing plane. The new plane’s normal direction is defined by the vector cross product of the existing plane normal by the projected vector.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 415 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Uniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the equal arc lengths or equal parametric values upon the user’s choice.

Main Index

416 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Plane Interpolate Example

Creates planes on curve 1 at the interpolating points. The plane’s normals are parallel to the tangents of Curve 1 at each location.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 417 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Nonuniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the space ratio applied on the arc length or the parametric values upon the user’s choice.

Main Index

418 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option The Least Squares method using the Point option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a set of points that are not co-linear.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 419 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Point Option Example

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Point 1:4.

Main Index

420 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option The Least Squares method using the Curve option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a non-linear curve.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 421 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Curve Option Example

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Curve 1.

Main Index

422 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option The Least Squares method using the Surface option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a surface.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 423 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Surface Option Example

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Surface 1.

Main Index

424 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Offset Method The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 425 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Offset Method Example

Creates planes, which are parallel to Plane 1 but have a offset of 1.0 from each other.

Main Index

426 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option The Tangent method using the Point option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a specified point on the surface. The plane centroid will be the point location on the surface.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 427 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Point Option Example

Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at Point 5.

Main Index

428 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option The Tangent method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a parametric position on the surface. The plane centroid will be the tangent point on the surface.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 429 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Parametric Option Example

Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at the specified parametric locations.

Main Index

430 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method The 3 Point method creates Planes which pass through three specified points that are not co-linear. The plane centroid will be average of the first point.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 431 Creating Planes

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions 3 Points Method Example

Creates a plane from Point 1:3.

Main Index

432 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Planes

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 433 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method The Magnitude method creates Vectors from a specified vector magnitude, direction and base point. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

434 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Magnitude Example

Creates a vector based at point 1 and directing along the X axis. The vector has a magnitude of 1.0.

Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method Between Two Points The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 435 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Vector Interpolate Method Example

Creates.

Main Index

436 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method The Intersect method creates Vectors from the intersections of pairs of Planes. The origins of the two planes will be projected onto the intersection line to determine the base and tip of the resulting vector. If the base and tip are not unique, the tip will be assumed.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 437 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Intersect Example

Creates a vector along the intersection of Plane 1 and Plane 2.

Main Index

438 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane; originating at the plane and passing through a point. The tip point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 439 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Plane Option Example

Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Plane 1.

Main Index

440 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 441 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Surface Option Example

Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Surface 1 at Point 5.

Main Index

442 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option The Normal method using the Element Face option creates Vectors from normal vectors to an Element Face. The base point of the vector will be the element face centroid by default, but a node on the element face may also be specified.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 443 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Element Face 2D Option Example

Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 6.

Main Index

444 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Element Face 3D Option Example

Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 445 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Product Method The Product method creates vectors of the cross products of two existing vectors. The base point of the created vector will be the base point of the first vector.

Main Index

446 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions Product Example

Creates Vector 3, which is the cross product of Vector 1 and Vector 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 447 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method The 2 Point method creates vectors between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

448 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Coordinate Frame Definitions 2 Point Option Example

Creates a vector starting from Point 1 and ending at Point 2.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 449 Creating Vectors

Main Index

450 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating P-Shapes

Creating P-Shapes Rectangle The rectangle is defined by an origin point p1, a corner point p2 along direction-1 or the u-direction, and a corner point p3 along direction-2 or the v-direction. All points are given with respect to the Reference Coordinate Frame. The point p3 is constrained to be orthogonal to the vector p1-p2 and will be corrected as necessary.

Quadrilateral A Quadrilateral is defined by an origin point p1, and corner points p2 in direction-1 (u-direction), and p3 in direction-2 (v-direction), and an opposite corner p4 in the Reference Coordinate Frame.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 451 Creating P-Shapes

Triangle A triangle is defined by an origin point p1, and corner points p2 in direction-1 (u-direction) and p3 in direction-2 (v-direction). In Patran, the triangle is created as a bi-parametric surface and has one degenerate side at the origin point p1.

Main Index

452 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating P-Shapes

Disc A disc is defined by an external and internal diameter. It is defined in a Reference Coordinate Frame with an Axis of Revolution shown as the vector p1-p2. The Angle Origin Vector is shown as vector p1p3 and the start and end angle are measured in degrees circumferentially from that vector.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 453 Creating P-Shapes

Cylinder A cylinder is defined by a diameter in a Reference Coordinate Frame with an Axis of Revolution shown as the vector p1-p2. This vector also gives the height of the cylinder. The Angle Origin Vector is shown as vector p1-p3 and the start and end angle are measured in degrees circumferentially from that vector.

Main Index

454 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating P-Shapes

Cone A cone is defined by diameters at the base and apex in a Reference Coordinate Frame with an Axis of Revolution shown as the vector p1-p2. This vector also gives the height of the cone. The Angle Origin Vector is shown as vector p1-p3 and the start and end angle are measured in degrees circumferentially from that vector.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 455 Creating P-Shapes

Sphere A sphere is defined by a diameter in a Reference Coordinate Frame with an Axis of Revolution shown as the vector p1-p2. The Angle Origin Vector is shown as vector p1-p3 and the start and end angle are measured in degrees circumferentially from that vector. The sphere may be truncated at the poles. The base truncation gives the height of the sphere from the equator to the “bottom” of the sphere. If the negative truncation distance is equal to the radius, then the sphere is not truncated. The same applies to the apex truncation. Note that a negative truncation distance measures “below” the equator while a positive truncation measures “above” the equator.

Main Index

456 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating P-Shapes

Paraboloid A paraboloid is defined by a diameter in a Reference Coordinate Frame with an Axis of Revolution shown as the vector p1-p2. This vector also gives the un-truncated height of the paraboloid. The Angle Origin Vector is shown as vector p1-p3 and the start and end angle are measured in degrees circumferentially from that vector. The paraboloid may be at the apex and also at the base. Both truncations are measured from the apex of the paraboloid.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 457 Creating P-Shapes

Five-Sided Box A Five-sided box is defined as a solid, but is an open-shell meaning that it is a connected set of five surfaces which is not closed. The five-sided box is defined with dimensions dx, dy, and dz in the x, y, and z directions at the global origin. The face that is "missing" from the 5-sided box is the z+ face. At the time of creation, a local coordinate frame is used to create the solid at a user-prescribed location. The local coordinate frame is represented by an axis which defines the local origin of the solid at the axis begin point and the x-direction of the solid. The y-direction is defined by a vector. The z-direction is defined ortho-normal to the x-y plane.

Main Index

458 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Creating P-Shapes

Six-Sided Box A Six-sided Box is a parameterized solid defined with dimensions dx, dy, and dz in the x, y, and z directions at the global origin. At the time of creation, a local coordinate frame is used to create the solid at a user-prescribed location. The local coordinate frame is represented by an axis which defines the local origin of the solid at the axis begin point and the x-direction of the solid. The y-direction is defined by a vector. The z-direction is defined ortho-normal to the x-y plane.

Main Index

Chapter 4: Create Actions 459 Creating P-Shapes

Main Index

460 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Edit P-Shapes

Edit P-Shapes This form is used to edit P-Shapes by their parameters. One or more P-Shapes of the same type may be modified. A P-Shape may be selected by its label. The P-Shapes listed in the listbox may be filtered by name or by type, e.g., Rectangle, Triangle, etc. P-Shapes which are listed in the listbox may be displayed on the screen using the “Show P-Shape” button and the display is reset using the “Reset” button. P-Shapes can also be selected off the screen using the “Select P-Shape(s)” select data box . Since different types of P-Shapes may be selected in either the listbox or in the select data box, the “Filter for P-Shape(s)” button is used to isolate one type of P-Shape. If only entity is selected for edit, then you can edit the P-Shape Label. The parameters to edit are identical to the Create P-Shape forms for each geometry type. If multiple entities are selected, certain parameters may not be editable such as the Axis of Revolution for cones (spheres, paraboloids) since modifying that parameter to be the same will transform all cones edited to be in the same location.

Main Index

Chapter 5: Delete Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

5

Main Index

Delete Actions



Overview of the Geometry Delete Action



Deleting Any Geometric Entity



Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors



Deleting Coordinate Frames

462

463

466

464

462 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Geometry Delete Action

Overview of the Geometry Delete Action The Geometry Application Delete action can remove any or all geometric entities from the database. Objects that are available for deletion are listed in Table 5-1. Table 5-1

Geometry Delete Action Objects and Descriptions

Object

Description

Any

Deletes different types of geometric entities at the same time.

Point

Deletes any number of points.

Curve

Deletes any number of curves.

Surface

Deletes any number of surfaces.

Solid

Deletes any number of solids.

Coord

Deletes any number of user defined coordinate frames.

Auto Execute Is Off By Default By default, the Auto Execute toggle is OFF. For more information, see Auto Execute (p. 26) in the Patran Reference Manual. Using the Abort and Undo Buttons When the Delete action form starts to execute, you may press the Abort key at any time to halt the delete process. You may also press the Undo button immediately after the Delete action completes to restore the deleted entities back to the database. See System Tool Palette (p. 14) in the Patran Reference Manual for more information.

Main Index

Chapter 5: Delete Actions 463 Deleting Any Geometric Entity

Deleting Any Geometric Entity Setting the Object menu to Any deletes any number of points, curves, surfaces, solids or coordinate frames (except the global coordinate frame, Coord 0) from the database. You can also delete geometric entities by using the Group/Delete menu.

Tip:

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Group>Delete (p. 289) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

464 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors

Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors Setting the Object menu to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector removes any number of specified points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from the database.

Main Index

Chapter 5: Delete Actions 465 Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors

Tip:

More Help: • The List Processor (p. 43) in the Patran Reference Manual • Group>Delete (p. 289) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

466 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Deleting Coordinate Frames

Deleting Coordinate Frames Setting the Object menu to Coord removes any number of specified user defined coordinate frames from the database The global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, cannot be deleted. Also, a coordinate frame will not be deleted if it is being referenced as a Nodal Reference Coordinate Frame or Analysis Coordinate Frame, elsewhere in the model.

Tip:

More Help: • The List Processor (p. 43) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions • Node Coordinate Frames (p. 47) in the Reference Manual - Part III

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

6

Main Index

Edit Actions



Overview of the Edit Action Methods



Editing Points



Editing Curves



Editing Surfaces



Editing Solids



Editing Features

472 474 520 591 634

470

470 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Edit Action Methods

Overview of the Edit Action Methods Object Point

Method • Equivalence

Description • Finds groups of points which are within global model tolerances

of each other and for each group, equivalences the points into one point. Curve

• Break

• Breaks curves into n+1 curves at either a point location or at a

parametric coordinate location. • Blend

• Creates curves from two or more curves or edges by forcing a

first derivative continuity across the boundaries. • Disassemble

• Creates curves that represent a specified chained curve.

• Extend

• Extends or lengthens one curve or edge or a pair of curves or

edges, either through a straight line extension, or through a continuous curvature. • Merge

• Creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or

edges. Some of the original curvature may be lost. • Refit

• Creates Uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from

existing curves. • Reverse

• Redefines the connectivity of a curve or edge by reversing the

curve’s or edge’s positive parametric direction. • Trim

• Shortens the length of a curve or edge at either a point location or

a parametric coordinate location on the curve. Surface

• Break

• Breaks a surface or a solid face into two or four smaller surfaces

at either a point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location on the surface. • Blend

• Creates surfaces from two or more surfaces or solid faces by

forcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. A parametric green surface is required for this operation to work. • Disassemble

• Creates surfaces that represent the specified B-rep solid.

• Edge Match

• Recreates a specified surface either by closing a gap between it

and another adjacent surface; or by creating an additional vertex and converting the surface into a trimmed surface. • Extend

• Extends or lengthens a surface: by a percentage in the U and/or V

parametric directions, to its intersection with a curve, plane, point or another surface, or by a fixed length. Also extends a pair of surfaces to their intersection. • Refit

• Creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic

patches from existing surfaces. • Reverse

• Redefines the connectivity of a surface or solid face by reversing

the surface’s or face’s positive parametric directions.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 471 Overview of the Edit Action Methods

Object

Method • Sew

Description • Combines Edit, Point, Equivalence and Edit, Surface, Edge

Match functionality to equivalence surface vertices and merge edges. Solid

• Break

• Breaks a solid into two, four or eight smaller solids either at a

point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location. • Blend

• Creates solids from two or more solids by forcing a first

derivative continuity across its boundaries. • Disassemble

• Creates surfaces that represent a specified B-rep solid.

• Refit

• Creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic solids from

existing solids. • Reverse

• Redefines the connectivity of a solid by reversing the solid’s

positive parametric directions.and moving the location of the parametric origin. Feature

• Suppress

• Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry

that can be suppressed from the geometric model • Unsuppress

• Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry

that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model. • Parameters

• Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry

whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based on the new parameter values.

Main Index

472 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Points

Editing Points Equivalencing Points The Point Equivalence method finds groups of points which are within global model tolerance of each other and for each group and equivalences the points into one point.

Editing Point Equivalence Method Example

Equivalences points 5 and 6 resulting in point 5 at the mid-point between points 5 and 6.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 473 Editing Points

Main Index

474 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Editing Curves Breaking Curves Breaking a Curve at a Point The Break method with the Point option creates n+1 curves by breaking an existing curve or edge at one or more point locations. The point locations can be defined by either existing points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. Also, the break point location does not have to lie on the curve or edge.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 475 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 33) in the Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) Curve Break Method At a Point Example

Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at Point 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 1 is deleted.

Main Index

476 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Break Method Between Two Points Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at the break location of Node 1. Notice that Node 1 does not have to be colinear with Points 1 and 2.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 477 Editing Curves

Curve Break Method At An Edge Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at the break location defined by Node 1.

Main Index

478 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location The Break method with the Parametric option creates two curves from an existing curve or edge, at the curve’s parametric ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 479 Editing Curves

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity

Main Index

480 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

• Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location Example

Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at in and the Parametric Direction is turned ON.

Main Index

ξ 1 Z 0.25 . Notice that

Delete Original Curves is pressed

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 481 Editing Curves

Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location On An Edge Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below) at ξ 1 Z 0.25 .

Main Index

482 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location The method breaks a curve with a plane. The curve will be broken at each intersection point with the plane.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 483 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

484 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Blending a Curve The Blend method creates a set of parametric cubic curves from an existing set of two or more curves or edges by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of existing curves or edges must be connected.

Tip:

Main Index

More Help:

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 485 Editing Curves

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factor = 1.0 Example

Creates Curves 6 through 10 by equally blending Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in.

Main Index

486 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factors Other Than 1.0 Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that four weighting factors are used for the four curve pairs: 1e-6, 1.0, 1.0, 1e6.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 487 Editing Curves

Disassembling a Chained Curve The Disassemble method operates on one or more chains (composite curves) and breaks them into the original curves that composed the chain. A chained curve can be created by using Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Chain form. Chained curves are usually used in Patran for creating trimmed surfaces.

Main Index

488 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 33) in the Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Creating Chained Curves (p. 131) • Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 277)

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 489 Editing Curves

Curve Disassemble Method Example

Creates Curves 8 through 13 from chained Curve 7. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 7 is deleted.

Main Index

490 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Extending Curves Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option The Extend method with the 1 Curve option extends one or more curves which start at either the beginning or the end of an existing curve or edge, and moves in the tangent direction for a defined length.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 491 Editing Curves

You can either extend curves in a straight line or maintain the same curvature as the existing curve or edge.

Main Index

492 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 493 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Understanding the List Processor (p. 766) in the Patran Reference Manual Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example

Extends curve 1 in a straight line by an actual length of 1.0.

Main Index

494 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Continuous Curvature is pressed in, instead of Straight Line, and Fraction of Original is pressed in based on a value of 1.5.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 495 Editing Curves

Curve Extend Method For One Edge Example

Creates Curve 1 by extending it from an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon listed below). Both Straight Line and Actual are pressed in, with a length of 1.0 entered.

Main Index

496 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Through Points switch modifies one curve by extending the curve through N-points.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 497 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Understanding the List Processor (p. 766) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

498 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Extend Method For Through Points Example

Extends Curve 1 by passing through the selected screen points.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 499 Editing Curves

Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Full Circle switch creates one curve by extending the curve to a full circle, given the start, end, or interior point of the curve. If the curve has zero radius of curvature, a circle will not be created.

Main Index

500 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Understanding the List Processor (p. 766) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 501 Editing Curves

Curve Extend Method For Full Circle Example

Extends Curve 1 to a full circle by selecting Curve 1 and then Point 1.

Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option The Extend method with the 2 Curve option extends a set of curves in a straight line by extending them from two existing curves or edges. Patran will extend the specified endpoints to where the two curves

Main Index

502 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

will intersect. If the distance from the intersection to the endpoint of one of the existing curves, is within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then Patran will extend only one curve instead of two. (The Global Model Tolerance is defined on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu).

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Preferences Commands (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 503 Editing Curves

Curve Extend Method For Two Curves Example

Extends Curves 1 and 2 to their point of intersection.

Curve Extend Method For A Curve and An Edge Example

Creates Curve 3 and extends Curve 1 by extending them from Curve 1 and an edge of Surface 1 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

504 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Merging Existing Curves The Merge method creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges. The shape of the new curves, relative to the existing curves or edges, will be preserved to the extent possible, but, in general, some detail will be lost. The existing curves or edges must be connected.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 505 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parameterization • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

Main Index

506 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Merge Method Example

Creates Curve 6 by merging Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 1 through 5 are deleted.

Curve Merge Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the merge tolerance is 0.00001.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 507 Editing Curves

Curve Merge Method Example

Creates Curves 6 through 8 from merging Curves 1 through 5.

Main Index

508 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Refitting Existing Curves The Refit method using the Uniform option creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from existing curves. The number of piecewise cubic segments per curve is input as the refit parameter.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 509 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Parameterization • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry

Main Index

510 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

Reversing a Curve The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of curves or edges by reversing the positive ξ 1 direction of the curves or edges. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form found under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 511 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

512 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Reverse Method Example

This example reverses Curves 6, 7 and 8. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed for the curves.

Curve Reverse Method With Associated Elements Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Curves 7, 8 and 9 have associated bar elements. Although the node IDs are not reversed, Patran internally reverses the bar elements’ connectivities. For example, for Bar 1 the nodes are stored as Nodes 2 and 1, instead of 1 and 2.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 513 Editing Curves

Trimming Curves Trimming a Curve With the Point Option The Trim method with the Point option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at a specified point location along each curve. The trim point can be defined by either existing points, nodes, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. You cannot trim existing edges.

Main Index

514 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Curve Trim Method At a Point Example

Trims Curve 9 at Point 9, with Point 9 cursor selected in the Curve/Point List as end of the curve to discard or trim off.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 515 Editing Curves

Curve Trim Method At a Point Example

Trims Curve 9 at the intersection of Curves 9 and 10 by using the Point select menu icon listed below for the Trim Point List. Point 8 is cursor selected for the Curve/Point List as the end of the curve to trim.

Main Index

516 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option The Trim method using the Parametric option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at a specified ξ 1 parametric coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . You cannot trim existing edges.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 517 Editing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

518 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Curves

Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example

Trims Curve 9 at

ξ 1 ( u ) Z 0.75 ,

where Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim.

Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 1 instead of Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim in the Curve/Point List box.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 519 Editing Curves

Main Index

520 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Editing Surfaces Surface Break Options Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option The Break method with the Curve option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face at a curve location.The curve location does not have to lie on the surface, but it must intersect on opposite edges of the surface or face. The curve location can be a curve, an edge or other curve locations provided on the Curve select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 521 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Surface Break Method At a Curve Example

Breaks Surface 1 at Curve 3. Notice that Curve 3 does not lie on Surface 1. Instead, Patran projects the curve break location on the surface. Also, Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted.

Main Index

522 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method At Two Points Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve break location is defined by Points 8 and 9 using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 523 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method At a Curve on a Face Example

Breaks a face of Solid 1 using the Surface select menu icon listed below, at the break location of Curve 1.

Main Index

524 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option The Break method with the Surface option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face at a surface location.The surface break location must intersect the surface or face on opposite edges. The surface break location can be a surface or a solid face.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 525 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Surface Break Method At a Surface Example

Creates Surface 4 and 5 by breaking Surface 1 in half with the break location of Surface 3.

Main Index

526 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option This method breaks a surface with a plane. The surface will be broken along its intersection with the plane.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 527 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option Example

Creates Surfaces 3 and 4 by breaking Surface 2 in half with the break location of Plane 1.

Main Index

528 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Breaking a Surface With the Point Option The Break method with the Point option creates two or four surfaces by breaking an existing surface or solid face defined at a point location. If the point is on an edge, then two surfaces are created. If the point is located on the interior, then four surfaces are created. The point location can be a point, a node, a vertex, a curve/curve intersection or a curve/surface intersection.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 529 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Surface Break Method At a Point Example

Breaks Surface 1 into four Surfaces at Point 5. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted.

Main Index

530 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method At a Point Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at Point 4 instead of Point 5, and Surfaces 2 and 3 are created instead of four surfaces.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 531 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method At a Vertex Example

Breaks Surface 1 along the diagonal into Surfaces 2 and 3 at Point 1 which is located at the vertex of Surface 1.

Main Index

532 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option The Break method using the 2 Point option creates two surfaces by breaking an existing surface or solid face defined by two point locations. The point locations must lie on opposite edges of the surface or face. The point locations can be points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 533 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology Surface Break Method At 2 Points Example

Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 defined by Point 5 and Node 1. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted.

Main Index

534 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option The Break method with the Parametric option creates two surfaces from an existing surface or solid face. The break location is defined at the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 535 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

536 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method At Parametric Location u=0.25 Example

Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 at ξ 1 ( u ) Z 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed.

Surface Break Method At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at

Main Index

ξ 2 ( v ) Z 0.25 .

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 537 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Method On a Face At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example

Breaks a face of Solid 1 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below at

Main Index

ξ 2 ( v ) Z 0.25 .

538 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Blending Surfaces The Blend method creates a set of parametric bi-cubic surfaces from an existing set of two or more surfaces or solid faces by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of existing surfaces or faces must share at least one edge with another surface or face in the set.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 539 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry

Note:

Main Index

A parametric green surface is required for this operation to work.

540 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Surface Blend Method Example

Blends Surfaces 1, 5, 3 and 4 with a default weight factor of 0.5 applied to all surface edges.

Surface Blend Method Example

Blends Surfaces 1 through 4 with a weighting factor of 1.0 applied to two edges (highlighted in the “Before” picture).

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 541 Editing Surfaces

Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces The Disassemble method operates on one or more trimmed surfaces and creates the parent surface that has the same curvature as the trimmed surface. A trimmed surface can be created either by using the Geometry Application’s Create/Surface/Trim form or by using the Create/Surface/Planar Trim form.

Main Index

542 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Trimmed Surfaces • Creating Trimmed Surfaces

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 543 Editing Surfaces

Surface Disassemble Method Example

Operates on Surface 2 which is a general trimmed surface. Surface 3 is the new parent surface. Notice that new curves associated with Surface 2 are also created.

Surface Disassemble Method Example

Operates on Surface 1 which is a planar trimmed surface. Notice that the new parent surface, Surface 2, is also planar and that new curves associated with Surface 1 are created.

Main Index

544 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Editing Edges from Surfaces Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option With this form you can remove a given edge of a trimmed surface. This process differs from the vertex removal function which was topological in nature. This operation is both topological and geometrical in that the shape of the trimmed surface will be altered as well as the topology. The edges adjacent to the

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 545 Editing Surfaces

removed edge will be extended until they intersect. This intersection must take place within the domain of the parent surface.

Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option With this form you can automatically remove all edges whose length is less than a specified value.

Main Index

546 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Adding Edges from Surfaces With this form you can automatically add edges to a surface.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 547 Editing Surfaces

Replacing Edges from Surfaces With this form you can automatically replace edges on a specified surface with an existing curve.

Main Index

548 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Matching Surface Edges Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option The Edge Match method with the 2 Surface option recreates the second surface of a specified pair that

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 549 Editing Surfaces

share two common vertices but has a gap or unmatched edges. The gap must be less than 10 times the Global Model Tolerance or else Patran will not close the gap. The existing pair of surfaces or faces do not need to have matching parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 orientations. This method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent surface pairs so that they are congruent before you mesh. Also see Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 269.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Topological Congruency and Meshing

Main Index

550 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Surface Edge Match Method Example

Edits Surface 2 which is specified as the second surface of the pair and closes the gap between Surfaces 1 and 2.

Surface Edge Match Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Surface 1 is specified as the second surface of the surface pair.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 551 Editing Surfaces

Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option The Edge Match method with the Surface-Point option recreates a specified surface as a trimmed surface that includes an additional cursor defined vertex point. This method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent pairs of surfaces so that they are congruent before you mesh.

Main Index

552 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Topological Congruency and Meshing Surface Edge Match Method With Surface-Point Example

Recreates Surface 1 which was a parametric bi-cubic surface, into a trimmed surface which has the vertices Points 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 so that Surface 1 is congruent with Surfaces 2 and 3. The additional vertex

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 553 Editing Surfaces

specified in the Point List was cursor selected at Point 5 by using the Vertex select menu icon listed below.

Extending Surfaces Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option This form is used to extend two surfaces to their line of intersection.

Main Index

554 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Extending a Surface With the 2 Surface Option Example

Extend surface 1 to the line of intersection of surface 2.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 555 Editing Surfaces

Extending Surfaces to a Curve This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting curve.

Main Index

556 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Extending a Surface to a Curve Example

Extend Surface 1 to the edge of Surface 2.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 557 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Extending Surfaces to a Plane This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting plane.

Main Index

558 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Extending a Surface to a Plane Example

Extend Surface 1 to Plane 1.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 559 Editing Surfaces

Extending Surfaces to a Point This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting point.

Main Index

560 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Extending a Surface to a Point Example

Extend Surface 1 to Point 1.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 561 Editing Surfaces

Extending Surfaces to a Surface This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting surface.

Main Index

562 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 563 Editing Surfaces

Extending a Surface to a Surface Example

Extend Surface 1 to the line of intersection of Surface 2 and break Surface 2 at the line of intersection to create Surface 3 and 4, then delete Surface 2.

Main Index

564 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option This form is used to extend a surface by a percentage in the U and/or V parametric directions.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 565 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Extending a Surface With the Percentage Option Example

Extend Surface 1 by 100% in the U direction starting at U-Max = 1 and shrink Surface 1 by 50% in the V direction starting at V-Max=1.

Main Index

566 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option This form is used to extend a surface by a fixed length.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 567 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Extending a Surface With the Fixed Length Option Example

Extend Surface 1 by a fixed length of 5.0 units in the X direction.

Main Index

568 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Refitting Surfaces The Refit method creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches from existing surfaces. The Refit Tolerance is input as the refit parameter.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 569 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Topological Congruency and Meshing

Main Index

570 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Reversing Surfaces The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by exchanging the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions of the surfaces or faces. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions for the surfaces by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 571 Editing Surfaces

• Connectivity • Parametric Cubic Geometry • Showing Surface Attributes Surface Reverse Method Example

Reverses the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions for Surface 1. Notice that the parametric directions are displayed on the surfaces. Also, notice that Auto Execute is not on so that you can press the Draw Normal Vectors button without executing the form.

Main Index

572 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Sewing Surfaces The Sew method sequentially combines the actions of the Edit/ Point/ Equivalence method to equivalence surface vertices and the Edit/ Surface/Edge Match method to merge edges. The composite action is a "sewing" of the surfaces. Vertices and edges are both equivalenced according to the restrictions of the previously mentioned methods; however, since the operation is sequential, vertices will already be equivalenced before doing the edge merging.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 573 Editing Surfaces

Surface Sew Method Example

Edits surfaces 1 and 2 by closing the gap between edges which share common vertices.

Main Index

574 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Subtracting Surfaces The Subtract method .

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 575 Editing Surfaces

Trimming Surfaces to an Edge This form is used to trim a Surface with one of its edges and optionally delete the surface with the smallest surface area after the trim.

Main Index

576 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Trim Surface To Edge Example

Trim the sliver from surface 5 by selecting the surface edge surface 5.4.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 577 Editing Surfaces

Adding a Fillet to a Surface This form facilitates the creation of a fillet edge between two existing edges sharing a given vertex. This operation, when successful will replace the input vertex with a new edge.

Main Index

578 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Adding a Hole to Surfaces Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option The Add Hole method using the Center Point option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The circular hole is defined in the tangent plane of the supplied, manifolded center point.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 579 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Center Point Option Example

This will add nine circular holes to surface 1 using points 52:60. Warning messages will be generated for the other points due to interference of holes at these points with surface edges.

Main Index

580 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option The Add Hole method using the Projection Vector option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The circular hole is defined in the plane of the supplied vector and vector-projected onto the surface.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 581 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Project Vector Option codeindent10

This will add two holes to surface 6 using points 78 and 82 and the projection vector defined by the x axis of Coordinate Frame 0.

Main Index

582 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option The Add Hole method using the Inner Loop option adds a hole to a Surface. The hole is defined by the supplied closed, chained curves which will define inner loops for the creation of a Trimmed Surface.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 583 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Inner Loop Option Example

This will add 5 new holes to surface 6 using curves 14, 15, 16, 29, and 30.

Main Index

584 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces The Remove Hole method removes a hole from a Trimmed Surface. The hole to remove can be any edgecurves which are inner loops of a Trimmed Surface.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 585 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Removing a Hole from a Trimmed Surface Example

This will remove all the small inner loops from surface 4.

Main Index

586 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Adding a Vertex to Surfaces The Add Vertex method adds a vertex to a surface. The point used to create a vertex can be any point which is on the edge of the selected surface. If a hardpoint is converted to a surface vertex in the process of adding a vertex to a surface, then this point(vertex) cannot be reassociated to the surface as a hardpoint.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 587 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Adding a Vertex to a Surface Example

This will add a vertex to surface 2 using point 3. The result is surface 2 becomes a trimmed surface with five vertices.

Main Index

588 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces The Remove Vertex method removes a vertex from a Trimmed Surface. The vertex to remove can be any vertex of a Trimmed Surface with the exception that one vertex per loop must remain.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 589 Editing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Removing a Vertex from a Trimmed Surface Example

This will remove vertex 3.4.2 from trimmed surface 3. The result is a parametric bicubic surface.

Main Index

590 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Surfaces

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 591 Editing Solids

Editing Solids Breaking Solids Breaking Solids with the Point Option The Break method with the Point option breaks an existing solid into two or four smaller solids at a point location. The point location can be on or within the solid.

More Help: • Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

592 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into eight solids by referencing Point 9. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 593 Editing Solids

Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on a face instead of inside of Solid 1, and four solids are created instead of eight.

Main Index

594 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on an edge instead of on a face of Solid 1, and two solids are created instead of four.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 595 Editing Solids

Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option The Break method with the Parametric option creates two, four or eight solids from an existing solid. The break location is defined at the solid’s parametric ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 coordinate locations where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 .

Main Index

596 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 597 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Connectivity • Display>Named Attributes (p. 392) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into eight smaller solids at ξ 1 Z 0.5 , ξ 2 Z 0.5 , and ξ 3 Z 0.5 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed.

Main Index

598 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except broken into four solids instead of eight.

Main Index

ξ1 Z 0

instead of

ξ 1 Z 0.5 ,

and Surface 1 is

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 599 Editing Solids

Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example

This example is similar to the first example, except ξ 1 Z and Surface 1 is broken into two solids instead of eight.

Main Index

0

and

ξ2 Z 0

instead of

ξ 1 Z 0.5

and

ξ 2 Z 0.5 ,

600 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Breaking Solids with the Curve Option The Break method with the Curve option breaks an existing solid into two solids at a curve break location. The curve location must completely lie on and bisect a face of the solid.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 601 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Solid Break Method with the Curve Option Example

Breaks Solids 2 and 3 into two solids each at Curve 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.

Main Index

602 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Breaking Solids with the Plane Option The method breaks a solid with a plane. The solid will be broken along its intersection with the plane.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 603 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology

Main Index

604 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Breaking a Solid with the Plane Option Example

Creates Solids 2 and 3 by breaking Solid 1 along its intersection with Plane 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.

Breaking Solids with the Surface Option The Break method with the Surface option breaks an existing solid into two smaller solids at a surface break location. The surface break location must completely pass through the solid.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 605 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into two solids at Surface 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.

Main Index

606 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Between Two Surfaces Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the solid is defined by Surfaces 2 and 3 by using the Solid select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 607 Editing Solids

Blending Solids The Blend method creates a set of parametric tri-cubic solids from an existing set of two or more solids, such that the first derivative continuity is maintained across the surface boundaries between adjacent solids. The existing solids can have any parametrization, but they must share common faces.

Main Index

608 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry • Topology • Parametric Cubic Geometry Solid Blend Method Example

Creates Solids 4, 5 and 6 by blending Solids 1, 2 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solids 1, 2 and 3 are deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 609 Editing Solids

Solid Blend Method Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that weighting factors, 1e6 and 1e-6, are used so that Solids 1 and 3 dominate the slope.

Main Index

610 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Disassembling B-rep Solids The Disassemble method operates on one or more boundary represented (B-rep) solids and breaks them into the original surfaces that composed each B-rep solid. A B-rep solid can be created by the Geometry Application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 611 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

612 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Disassemble a B-rep Solid Example

Disassemble solid 1 into its constituent surfaces and convert all possible surfaces into Simply Trimmed surfaces (green). If “Conver to Simply Trimmed” toggle was OFF, the resulting surfaces would maintain their original type; (magenta).

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 613 Editing Solids

Refitting Solids Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.

Main Index

614 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Solids • Building B-rep Solids • Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 615 Editing Solids

Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Solids

Main Index

616 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

• Building B-rep Solids • Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid

Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 617 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Solids • Building B-rep Solids • Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid

Main Index

618 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Reversing Solids The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of solids by exchanging the positive and ξ 2 directions of the solids. Then, to maintain a positive parametric frame, Patran translates the

ξ1

parametric origin up the original ξ 3 axis and then reverses the ξ 3 direction. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions for the solids by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry.

Solid Reverse Method Example

Reverses the parametric directions for Solid 1 (only the top half of Solid 1 is shown). Notice that the parametric origin is relocated.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 619 Editing Solids

Solid Boolean Operation Add This form is used to perform a Solid boolean of “Add”.

Main Index

620 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Boolean Operation Add Example

Add Solids 2 and 3 to Solid 1.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 621 Editing Solids

Solid Boolean Operation Subtract This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Subtract”.

Main Index

622 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Boolean Operation Subtract Example

Subtract solids 2 and 3 from solid 1.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 623 Editing Solids

Solid Boolean Operation Intersect This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Intersect”.

Main Index

624 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Boolean Operation Intersect Example

Intersect solids 2 and 3 with solid

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 625 Editing Solids

Creating Solid Edge Blends Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges This form is used to create a constant radius edge blend on an edge(s) of a solid.

Main Index

626 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Creating Constant Radius Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example

Create an Edge Blend of Radius 0.25 on Solid 7 edges Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 and 7.3.1.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 627 Editing Solids

Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges This form is used to create a constant angle chamfer on an edge(s) of a solid.

Main Index

628 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example

Create Chamfers with offset of 0.02 and angle of 45 degrees on Solid 1 edges Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12 1.1.6 1.1.4 1.2.4 and 1.4.4.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 629 Editing Solids

Imprinting Solid on Solid This form is used to imprint solid bodies on solid bodies.

Main Index

630 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Imprint Solid on Solid Example

Imprint Solid Cylinders 2 and 3 onto the faces of Solid Block 1. The Cylinders have been deleted to show the results of the imprint.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 631 Editing Solids

Solid Shell Operation This form is used to create a void in a solid by shelling the selected faces.

Main Index

632 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Solids

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual Solid Shell Operation Example

Shell solids 1t4 with a wall thickness=0.25 using faces solid 4.1 4.2 3.6 2.1 2.4 2.5 1.4 and 1.2.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 633 Editing Solids

Main Index

634 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Features

Editing Features Suppressing a Feature The Edit,Feature,Suppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be suppressed from the geometric model.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 635 Editing Features

Unsuppressing a Feature The Edit,Feature,Unsuppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.

Main Index

636 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Features

Editing Feature Parameters The Edit,Feature,Parameters method displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based on the new parameter values.

Main Index

Chapter 6: Edit Actions 637 Editing Features

Feature Parameter Definition The Feature Parameter Definition form allows the parameters of a CAD feature to be displayed and modified for regeneration of a CAD model.

Main Index

638 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Editing Features

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

7

Main Index

Show Actions



Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods



Showing Points



Showing Point Distance



Showing Surfaces



Showing Surface Normals



Showing Solids



Showing Coordinate Frames



Showing Planes

681



Showing Vectors

686

642 644

669 63

677 679

640

640 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods

Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods Figure 7-1 Object Point

Method • Location

Description • Shows the coordinate value locations for a list of specified

points or vertices. You may enter a reference coordinate system ID to express the coordinate values within. • Distance

• Shows the distance and the x, y and z offsets between one or

more pairs of points and/or vertices. • Node

• Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified point

or vertex that is within the Global Model Tolerance value. Curve

• Attributes

• Lists the geometric type, length, and starting and ending points

for a list of specified curves or edges. • Arc

• Shows the total number of Arcs in the model, total number of

Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance. • Angle

• Shows the angle between two curves for a list of specified

curves or edges. • Length Range

• Shows the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of

specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length Range specified. • Node

• Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified curve

or edge that is within the Global Model Tolerance value. Surface

• Attributes

• Lists the number of vertices and edges associated with each

specified surface or solid face, as well as the area and geometric type. • Area Range

• Shows the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of

specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range specified. • Node

• Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified surface

or solid face that is within the Global Model Tolerance value. Solid

• Attributes

• Lists the number of vertices, surfaces (or faces) associated with

each specified solid, as well as the solid’s volume and geometric type. Coord

• Attributes

• Shows the ID, the xyz coordinate location of the origin and the

type for each specified coordinate frame.

Main Index

Plane

• Attributes

Vector

• Attributes

Chapter 7: Show Actions 641 Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods

The Show Action Information Form When a Show action is executed, Patran will display a spreadsheet form at the bottom of the screen. This form displays information on the geometric entities that were specified on the Show action form. Cells on the form that have a dot (.), means there is additional information associated with that cell. If a cell with the dot is pressed with the cursor, associated information is displayed in the textbox at the bottom of the form.

Tip:

More Help:

• Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet • Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet • Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet • Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

642 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Points

Showing Points Showing Point Locations Setting Object to Point and Info to Location will show for a list of specified point locations, the coordinate value locations that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Also shown is the element property set assigned to the points. Point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 643 Showing Points

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

644 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Showing Point Distance Showing Point Distance with the Point Option Show the distance between two points. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and point location data for each point pair.

Tip:

Main Index

More Help:

Chapter 7: Show Actions 645 Showing Point Distance

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

646 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Cell Callback Actions From Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

To Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.

Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option Show the distance between point/curve pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/curve pair.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 647 Showing Point Distance

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

648 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 649 Showing Point Distance

Cell Callback Actions From Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

From Curve ID

Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other Columns

Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the curve where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option Show the distance between point/surface pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/surface pair.

Main Index

650 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 651 Showing Point Distance

Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

652 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Cell Callback Actions To Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

From Surface ID

Highlights the surface using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the surface (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option Show the distance between point/Plane pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/plane pair.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 653 Showing Point Distance

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

654 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Show Point/Curve Vector Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 655 Showing Point Distance

Cell Callback Actions To Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

From Vector ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the vector (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option Show the distance between point/vector pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/vector pair.

Main Index

656 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Coordinate Frame Definitions

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 657 Showing Point Distance

Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

658 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Point Distance

Cell Callback Actions To Point ID

Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

From Plane ID

Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the plane (type, etc.) in the textbox.

Reference CID

Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.

Other columns

Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing the Nodes on a Point Setting Object to Point and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on at specified point locations that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 659 Showing Point Distance

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

660 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Curves

Showing Curves Showing Curve Attributes Setting Object to Curve and Info to Attributes will show the geometric type, length, the starting and ending points, and material and element properties for a list of specified curves or edges.

Tip:

Main Index

More Help:

Chapter 7: Show Actions 661 Showing Curves

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Showing Curve Arc Setting Object to Curve and Info to Arc will show the total number of Arcs in the model, total number of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance.

Main Index

662 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 663 Showing Curves

Showing Curve Angle Setting Object to Curve and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of curves. The point on each curve where the angle is calculated from is shown via a primary graphics marker in the graphics marker color. This is useful if the two curves do not intersect.

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology

Main Index

664 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Curves

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 665 Showing Curves

Cell Callback Actions First Curve ID

Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.

Second Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox. Other Columns

Highlights both curves in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on each curve at the respective locations where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Curve Length Range Setting Object to Curve and Info to Length Range will show the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length Range specified.

Main Index

666 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Curves

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 667 Showing Curves

Showing the Nodes on a Curve Setting the Object to Curve and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the specified curves or edges that are within the Global Model Tolerance.

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry

Main Index

668 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Curves

• Types of Geometry in Patran (p. 19) • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 669 Showing Surfaces

Showing Surfaces Showing Surface Attributes Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and edges associated with each specified surface or solid face, as well as the its area, geometry type and material and element properties .

Main Index

670 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Parameterization • Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 671 Showing Surfaces

Showing Surface Area Range Setting Object to Surface and Info to Area Range will show the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range specified.

Tip:

More Help:

• Parameterization • Topology

Main Index

672 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Surfaces

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18) • Types of Geometry in Patran (p. 19) • The Show Action Information Form

Showing the Nodes on a Surface Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the specified surfaces or solid faces that are within the Global Model Tolerance.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 673 Showing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

674 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Surfaces

Showing Surface Normals Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Normals enables the user to display surface normals of varying densities on the surface.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 675 Showing Surfaces

Main Index

676 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Surfaces

Tip:

More Help:

• Topology • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry • Types of Geometry in Patran • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 677 Showing Solids

Showing Solids Showing Solid Attributes Setting the Object to Solid and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and faces associated with each specified solid, as well as the volume, geometry type and material and element properties .

Tip:

More Help:

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry

Main Index

678 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Solids

• Solids • The Show Action Information Form

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 679 Showing Coordinate Frames

Showing Coordinate Frames Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes Setting the Object to Coord and Info to Attributes will list the ID, the coordinate value location of the coordinate frame’s origin and the coordinate frame type for each specified coordinate frame.

Tip:

More Help:

• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry

Main Index

680 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Coordinate Frames

• Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60 • The Show Action Information Form, 641

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 681 Showing Planes

Showing Planes Showing Plane Attributes Setting Object to Plane and Info to Attributes will show for a list of specified plane, displaying the plane origins and the plane normal that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame.

Tip:

More Help:

• Showing Point Locations

Main Index

682 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Planes

Showing Plane Angle Setting Object to Plane and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of planes.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 683 Showing Planes

Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet

Main Index

684 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Planes

Showing Plane Distance Setting Object to Plane and Info to Distance will show the distance between pairs of planes.

Main Index

Chapter 7: Show Actions 685 Showing Planes

Main Index

686 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Showing Vectors

Showing Vectors Showing Vector Attributes Setting Object to Vector and Info to Attributes will show a list for a specified vector displaying the vector origins and the vector directions that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame.

Tip:

More Help:

• Showing Point Locations

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

8

Main Index

Transform Actions



Overview of the Transform Methods



Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors 691



Transforming Coordinate Frames

688

779

688 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Transform Methods

Overview of the Transform Methods Object Point

Method • Translate

Description • Create points by successively offsetting them through a translation

vector from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices. • Rotate

• Create points by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices. • Scale

• Create points by scaling an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.

• Mirror

• Create points by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of points,

nodes or vertices. • MCoord

• Creates points by translating and rotating them from an existing set

of points, nodes, or vertices by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates points from existing points, nodes or vertices by using a

planar rotation defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates points by translating and rotating existing points, nodes or

vertices, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. • Vsum

• Creates points by performing a vector sum of the coordinate

locations of two sets of existing points, nodes or vertices. • MScale

• Creates points by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or

warping an existing set of points, nodes or vertices. Curve

• Translate

• Create curves by successively offsetting them through a translation

vector from an existing set of curves or edges. • Rotate

• Create curves by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of curves or edges. • Scale

• Create curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.

• Mirror

• Create curves by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of curves

or edges. • MCoord

• Creates curves by translating and rotating them from an existing set

of curves or edges by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates curves from existing curves or edges by using a planar

rotation defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates curves by translating and rotating existing curves or edges,

using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. • Vsum

• Creates curves by performing a vector sum of the coordinate

locations of two sets of existing curves or edges. • MScale

• Creates curves by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or

warping an existing set of curves or edges.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 689 Overview of the Transform Methods

Object Surface

Method • Translate

Description • Create surfaces by successively offsetting them through a

translation vector from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces. • Rotate

• Create surfaces by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces. • Scale

• Create a set of curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.

• Mirror

• Create surfaces by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of

surfaces or solid faces. • MCoord

• Creates surfaces by translating and rotating them from an existing

set of surfaces or solid faces by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates surfaces from existing surfaces or solid faces by using a

planar rotation defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates surfaces by translating and rotating existing surfaces or

solid faces, using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. • Vsum

• Creates surfaces by performing a vector sum of the coordinate

locations of two sets of existing surfaces or solid faces. • MScale

• Creates surfaces by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating

and/or warping an existing set of surfaces or solid faces. Solid

• Translate

• Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation

vector from an existing set of solids. • Rotate

• Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of solids. • Scale

• Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.

• Mirror

• Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.

• MCoord

• Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set

of solids by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation

defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a

transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. • Vsum

• Creates solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate

locations of two sets of existing solids. • MScale

• Creates solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or

warping an existing set of solids.

Main Index

690 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Transform Methods

Object Coord

Method • Translate

Description • Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by

successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing set of coordinate frames. • Rotate

• Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by

performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of coordinate frames. Plane

• Translate

• Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation

vector from an existing set of solids. • Rotate

• Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of solids. • Mirror

• Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.

• MCoord

• Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set

of solids by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation

defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a

transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. Vector

• Translate

• Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation

vector from an existing set of solids. • Rotate

• Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined

axis from an existing set of solids. • Mirror

• Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.

• MCoord

• Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set

of solids by referencing coordinate frames. • Pivot

• Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation

defined by three point locations. • Position

• Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a

transformation defined by three original and three destination point locations. • Scale

Main Index

• Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 691 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors The Translate method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids planes or vectors which are successively offset from each other by a defined Translation Vector . Points can be translated from points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be translated from curves or edges. Surfaces can be translated from surfaces or solid faces. Solids are translated from solids.

Main Index

692 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 693 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions • Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames Translating Points Radially

Creates Points 8 through 14 by translating Points 1 through 7, three units radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.

Main Index

694 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Points

This example is the same as the previous example, except Cartesian in Refer. CF is pressed instead of Curvilinear in Refer. CF.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 695 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Curves

Creates Curves 2 through 6 by translating Curves 1 three times - two units in the X direction and one unit in the Y direction within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Main Index

696 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Curves Radially

Translates Curve 1 three times and radially one unit outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 697 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Edges

Creates Curve 2 by translating the outside edge of Surface 1, two units radially outward within cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.

Main Index

698 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 by translating Surface 1 two times - one unit in the X direction and two units in the Y direction within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 10.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 699 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Surfaces Radially

Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 by translating Surface 1 three times and one unit radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.

Main Index

700 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Solid Faces

Creates Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating the top faces of Solids 1 through 4, 0.5 units radially outward within the spherical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 701 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Solids

Translates Solids 1 through 4, 1.5 units in the X direction and 1.5 units in the Y direction, within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solids 1:4 are deleted.

Main Index

702 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Solids

Creates Solid 2 by translating Solid 1, 90 degrees within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 703 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Planes

Translates Plane 1 2 units in the Z direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Note that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.

Main Index

704 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating Vectors

Translates Vector 1 2 units in the X direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 705 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of entities. Points can be rotated from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be rotated from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be rotated from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are rotated from other solids.

Main Index

706 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 707 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Rotating Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 14 from Point 1 and Node 10 by rotating them six times, 30 degrees about the global rectangular coordinate frame’s Z axis, Coord 0.3, with an offset angle of 60 degrees. (Coord 0.3 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below and cursor selecting Coord 0.)

Main Index

708 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Curves

Creates Curves 2 through 7 by rotating Curve 1 six times, 30 degrees about the axis defined by {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that the axis definition is equivalent to Coord 0.3 from the previous example.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 709 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating From An Edge

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 6 are rotated from an edge of Surface 1.

Main Index

710 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 4 through 18 by rotating from Surfaces 1, 2 and 3, five times, 30 degrees each about the axis defined by Points 4 and 1. The axis is defined by cursor selecting the points using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 711 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating From Solid Faces

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 16 are rotated from the outside faces of Solid 1.

Main Index

712 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Solids

Creates Solids 2 through 4 by rotating from Solid 1, three times, 90 degrees each about the global Z axis, Coord 0.3. Coord 0.3 is cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 713 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Planes

Rotates Plane 1 90 degrees around the Y Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.

Main Index

714 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Rotating Vectors

Rotates Vector 1 90 degrees around the Z Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 715 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors The Scale method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids or vectors by scaling an existing set of entities. Points can be scaled from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are scaled from other solids.

Main Index

716 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 717 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions • Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames Scaling Points and Nodes

Creates Points 6 through 9 by scaling them from Points 1, 2, 5 and Node 100 two times along the global X and Y axes, with Point 4 as the origin of scaling.

Main Index

718 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling Points Radially

Creates Points 25 through 44 by scaling them from the points on the outside edge of Surfaces 1 through 4, two times radially within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF and Delete Original Points are pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 719 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling Curves

Creates Curve 2 by scaling them from Curve 1, 1.5 times along the X axis of rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 1 is deleted.

Main Index

720 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling From An Edge

Creates Curves 1 through 4 by scaling them from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, 1.5 times radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 721 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by scaling Surfaces 1 through 4 1.5 times along the radial axis of cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Cartesian in Refer. CF and Delete Original Surfaces are pressed.

Main Index

722 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling Surfaces Radially

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is selected instead of Cartesian in Refer. CF.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 723 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling From Solid Faces

Creates Surface 1 by scaling it from the top face of Solid 1, 1.5 times in the X, Y and Z directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Main Index

724 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling From Solids

Creates Solids 5 through 8 by scaling them from Solids 1 through 4, two times in the X and Y directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 725 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Scaling From Vectors

Scales Vector 1 with a scale factor of 2 in the X direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

726 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of entities. Points can be mirrored from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be mirrored from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be mirrored from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are mirrored from other solids.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 727 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Mirroring Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 12 by mirroring them from Points 1 through 6 and Node 100, about the mirror plane whose normal is the global X axis, Coord 0.1. Coord 0.1 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

728 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Curves

Creates Curves 3 and 4 by mirroring them from Curves 1 and 2 about the plane whose normal is the global Y axis, Coord 0.2, and with an offset of Y=-1.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 729 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring From Edges

Creates Curves 1 through 8 by mirroring them from the inner and outer edges of Surfaces 5 through 8 about the plane whose normal is rectangular coordinate frame 1’s Y axis, Coord 1.2.

Main Index

730 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Surfaces

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 4 are mirrored from Surfaces 5 through 8.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 731 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Solids

Creates Solid 2 by mirroring Solid 1 about the plane whose normal is defined by {[0 0 0][1 0 0]}. Notice that the mirror plane normal definition is the same as entering the global X axis, Coord 0.1.

Main Index

732 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Planes

Mirrors Plane 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Plane is not pressed and Plane 2 is not reversed.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 733 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring Vectors

Mirrors Vector 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Vector is not pressed and Vector 2 is not reversed.

Main Index

734 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method) Translates and rotates a new set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from an existing set of entities by referencing coordinate frames. The new entities’ local position with respect to the To Coordinate Frame is the same as the local position of the original entities with respect to the From Coordinate Frame. Points can be moved from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be moved from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved from other solids.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 735 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Moving Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 12 from Points 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and Node 100 by moving them from the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.

Main Index

736 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Curves

Creates Curves 7 through 12 by moving Curves 1 through 6 from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200 to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 737 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving From Edges

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 8 are moved from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, from Coord 200 to Coord 300.

Main Index

738 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by moving from Surfaces 1 through 4 from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 739 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Solids

Creates Solids 5 through 8 by moving Solids 1 through 4 from the global coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1.

Main Index

740 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Planes

Moves Plane 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 741 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving Vectors

Moves Vector 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

742 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by using a planar rotation defined by a specified Pivot Point about which the entity will be rotated, and a Starting Point and Ending Point for the rotation. Points can be pivoted from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be pivoted from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be pivoted from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are pivoted from other solids.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 743 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual

Main Index

744 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

• Coordinate Frame Definitions Pivoting Points

Creates Point 4 from Point 3 by pivoting at the global origin, [0 0 0], from Node 100 to Point 2.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 745 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Curves

Creates Curves 9 through 15 from Curves 1 through 6 by pivoting them at Point 12, from Point 14 to Point 13. (Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.)

Main Index

746 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting From Edges

Creates Curves 9 through 16 by pivoting from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, at Point 12, from Point 14 to Point 13. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 747 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Surfaces

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 4 are pivoted to create Surfaces 5 through 8. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.

Main Index

748 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Solids

Creates Solid 2 by pivoting from Solid 1 at Point 1, from Point 2 to Point 3. Curves 1 and 2 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 749 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Planes

Pivots Plane 1 using the 3 pivoting points, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.

Main Index

750 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Pivoting Vectors

Pivots Vector 1 using the 3 pivoting points, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 751 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by translating and rotating an existing set of entities using a transformation defined by three original point locations to three destination point locations.

Main Index

752 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

The original points and destination points need not match exactly; however, if either the original point locations or the destination point locations lie in a straight line, the transformation cannot be performed. Points can be repositioned from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be repositioned from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be repositioned from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are repositioned from other solids.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 753 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

754 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 33) in the MD Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) Positioning Points

Creates Points 9 through 12 from Points 1through 4 by repositioning them based on the original and destination point locations listed on the form.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 755 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Curves

Creates Curves 25 through 32 by repositioning Curves 13 through 24 from Points 9, 13 and 12, to destination Points 2, 6 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 13 through 24 are deleted.

Main Index

756 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning From Edges

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the edges of Solid 1 are repositioned to the new location to create Curves 13 through 20.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 757 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Surfaces

Creates Surface 5 from Surface 4 by positioning it from Points 8, 9 and 11 to the destination Points 7, 2 and 3.

Main Index

758 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Solids

Creates Solid 3 by repositioning it from Solid 2, based on the original and destination points listed on the form. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 2 is deleted.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 759 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Planes

Positions Plane 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.

Main Index

760 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Positioning Vectors

Positions Vector 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 761 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Creates points, curves, surfaces or solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two sets of existing entities to form one set of new entities. Points can be created from the summation of other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be created from the summation of other curves or edges. Surfaces can be created from the summation of other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are created from the summation of other solids.

Main Index

762 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 763 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Vector Summing Points

Creates Points 7, 8 and 9 by summing the vectors drawn from the origin, [0 0 0], to Points 1 and 4, 2 and 5 and 3 and 6. The “After” picture below has the vectors drawn to Points 2 and 5 to show how Point 8 was created.

Main Index

764 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing Points

This example is the same as the previous example, except that a Multiplication Factor 2 is increased from “1 1 1” to “2 2 2”.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 765 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing Curves

Creates Curves 20 through 27 which are summed between Curves 12 through 19 and Curves 1 through 4. Notice that in order to create the spiral, Curve 1:4 must be entered twice in the Curve 2 List to match the eight curves listed in the Curve 1 List.

Main Index

766 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing Curves

Creates Curve 3 by summing Curves 1 and 2. Notice that the multiplication factors of “.5 .5 .5” are entered for both Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 and Curve 3 becomes the “average” of Curves 1 and 2 in length and in curvature.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 767 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing Surfaces

This example creates Surface 4 from vector summing the coordinate locations of Surfaces 1 and 3.

Main Index

768 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing With Solid Faces

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surface 4 is created by vector summing the coordinate locations of the outside face of Solid 1 and Surface 3.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 769 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Vector Summing Solids

Creates Solid 3 by vector summing the coordinate locations of Solids 1 and 2.

Main Index

770 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces and solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping an existing set of entities. Points can be moved and scaled from other points, nodes or vertices.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 771 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Curves can be moved and scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved and scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved and scaled from other solids.

Main Index

772 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 773 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Translating and Mirroring Points

Creates Points 8 through 13 by simultaneously translating and mirroring Points 1 though 7, two units in the global X direction and mirroring about the global YZ plane.

Main Index

774 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring and Scaling Curves

Creates Curves 7 through 12 by simultaneously scaling and mirroring Curves 1 through 6. The curves are scaled two times in the global Y direction and they are mirrored about the global XZ plane.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 775 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Mirroring and Scaling Curves

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the curves are mirrored and scaled within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.

Main Index

776 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating and Rotating Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 from Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating them 10 units in the global Z direction and rotating them -120 degrees about the global X axis.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 777 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Translating, Mirroring and Scaling Solids

This example simultaneously translates, mirrors and scales Solids 5 through 8 from Solids 1 through 4, by translating them 1.57 units in the global X direction and 1.0 unit in the global Y direction; mirroring them about the global XZ plane; and scaling them .5 in the X direction and .5 in the Y direction.

Main Index

778 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 779 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Transforming Coordinate Frames Translating Coordinate Frames Creates coordinate frames which are successively offset from each other by the Translation Vector , starting from an existing set of specified coordinate frames.

Tip:

Main Index

More Help:

780 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Coordinate Frames

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Translating Coordinate Frames

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by translating it two units in the global X direction.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 781 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Translating Coordinate Frames

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by translating it through a translation vector defined by Points 1 and 2, using the Vector select menu icon listed below.

Main Index

782 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Rotating Coordinate Frames Creates a set of coordinate frames which are formed from a specified set of existing coordinate frames by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 783 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Main Index

784 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Tip:

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual • Coordinate Frame Definitions Rotating Coordinate Frames

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by rotating it 45 degrees about the axis listed on the form.

Main Index

Chapter 8: Transform Actions 785 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Rotating Coordinate Frames

Creates the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, by rotating it 90 degrees about Coord 100’s Z axis, Coord 100.3, using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Notice that Delete Original Coords is pressed and Coord 100 is deleted.

Main Index

786 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Main Index

Chapter 9: Verify Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

9

Verify Actions



Main Index

Verify Actions

787

788 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Verify Action

Verify Action Verifying Surface Boundaries The Boundary method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used in creating a B-rep solid.

Main Index

Chapter 9: Verify Actions 789 Verify Action

Main Index

790 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Verify Action

Verifying Surfaces for B-reps The B-rep method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used in creating a B-rep solid.

Main Index

Chapter 9: Verify Actions 791 Verify Action

Update Graphics Subordinate Form The Update Graphics subordinate form is displayed when the Update Graphics button is pressed on the Verify/Surface/Boundaries form. This subordinate form allows you to erase or plot in the current viewport, groups of congruent or incongruent surfaces. This form is useful for checking for surface cracks, topologically incongruent surfaces, or non-manifold edges shared by more than two surfaces. MSC.Software Corporation suggests you use either the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form (see Matching Surface Edges) or the Create/Surface/Match form (see Matching Adjacent Surfaces) to correct any incongruent surfaces that have a gap between them.

Main Index

792 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Verify Action

Tip:

More Help: • Topological Congruency and Meshing • Building a Congruent Model • Group>Create (p. 263) in the Patran Reference Manual

Verify - Surface (Duplicates) Surfaces in the entire model are checked for being duplicate.

Main Index

Chapter 9: Verify Actions 793 Verify Action

Main Index

794 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Verify Action

Main Index

Chapter 10: Associate Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

10

Associate Actions



Main Index

Overview of the Associate Action

796

796 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Associate Action

Overview of the Associate Action The Associate action causes a geometric entity to become embedded on another geometric entity. Surfaces with associated geometry will not get trimmed (i.e., a four sided iso parametric patch will remain so even after associations are made to the patch). Associations allow the mesher to create nodes on or along the associated geometry. Loads or boundary conditions may be applied to associated geometries. Mesh seeds can be placed on the associated geometry. The nodes lying on the associated geometry have the associated geometry as topological associations (i.e., nodes that lie on a curve associated to a surface will have their topological associations to the curve rather than with the surface). Associations are marked by filled blue triangles for points and filled yellow triangles for curves. Table 10-1 Object • Point

• Curve

Geometry Associate Action Objects and Descriptions Method

Description

Curve

Associate point to a curve.

Surface

Associate point to a surface.

Curve

Associate curve to a curve.

Surface

Associate curve to a surface.

Important:The iso-mesher will not generate meshes that conform to hard geometries, if the hard geometries lie interior to the surface. The iso-mesher ignores the interior hard geometries to mesh the surface.

Main Index

Chapter 10: Associate Actions 797 Overview of the Associate Action

Associating Point Object

Figure 10-1

Main Index

798 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Associate Action

Figure 10-2

Main Index

Chapter 10: Associate Actions 799 Overview of the Associate Action

Associating Curve Object

Figure 10-3

Main Index

800 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Associate Action

Figure 10-4

Main Index

Chapter 11: Disassociate Actions Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

11

Disassociate Actions



Main Index

Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

802

802 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods The disassociate action causes the association records to be deleted. All other information such as mesh seed and loads and boundary conditions will be preserved on the disassociated entity, if there are any. The disassociate action causes the filled blue triangles and yellow triangles that mark the association of points and curves respectively, to be removed.

Main Index

Chapter 11: Disassociate Actions 803 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

Object

Description

• Point

• Remove all point associations.

• Curve

• Remove all curve associations.

• Surface

• Remove all surface associations.

Disassociating Points

Figure 11-1

Main Index

804 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

Disassociating Curves

Disassociating Surfaces

Main Index

Chapter 11: Disassociate Actions 805 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

Figure 11-2

Main Index

806 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

Main Index

Chapter 12: The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

12

The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry 

Main Index

Renumber Forms

809

808 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Introduction

Introduction Most often, ID numbers (IDs) for geometric entities are chosen and assigned automatically. The Renumber Action permits the IDs of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes, or vectors to be changed. This capability is useful to: • Offset the IDs of a specific list of entities. • Renumber the IDs of all existing entities within a specified range. • Compact the IDs of an entity type sequentially from 1 to N.

IDs must be positive integers. Duplicate IDs are not permitted in the List of New IDs, or in the selected Entity List (old IDs). A Starting ID or a List of New IDs may be entered in the input databox. If a geometric entity outside the list of entities being renumbered is using the new ID, the renumber process will print a warning message stating which ID is already in use and proceed to use the next highest avaliable ID since each entity must have a unique ID. The default is to renumber all the existing entities beginning with the minimum ID through the maximum ID consecutively starting with 1. If only one ID is entered, it is assumed to be the starting ID. The entities will be renumbered consecutively beginning with the starting ID. If more than one ID is entered and there are fewer IDs in the List of New IDs than there are valid entities in the selected Entity List, renumbering will use the IDs provided and when the list is exhausted, the next highest available ID will be used thereafter to complete the renumbering. The List of New IDs may contain a # signifying to use the maximum ID + 1 as the Starting ID. However, the list may have more IDs than needed. The IDs in the selected Entity List may contain a #. The value of the maximum existing ID is automatically substituted for the #. There may be gaps of nonexisting entities in the list but there must be at least one valid entity ID in order for renumbering to take place. A percent complete form shows the status of the renumber process. When renumbering is complete, a report appears in the command line indicating the number of entities renumbered and their new IDs. The renumber process may be halted at any time by pressing the Abort button and the old IDs will be restored.

Main Index

Chapter 12: The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry 809 Renumber Forms

Renumber Forms When Renumber is the selected Action the following options are available. Object • Point

Description • The point menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDS of points. • Curve

• The curve menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDs of curves. • Surface

• The surface menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDs of surfaces. • Solid

• The solid menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDs of solids. • Plane

• The plane menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDs of planes. • Vector

• The vector menu selection provides the capability to renumber or

change the IDs of vectors.

Main Index

810 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2 Renumber Forms

Renumber Geometry

Main Index

jp`Kc~íáÖìÉ=nìáÅâ=pí~êí=dìáÇÉ

Index Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

fåÇ Éñ == Index

Numerics

C

3 point method overview, 64

CAD access modules, 47 CAD user file, 2, 20, 46, 47 capabilities, 2 Cartesian in Refer. CF button, 67 CATIA, 2, 47 chain method curve, 133 chained curve, 21, 22 conic method curve, 135 connectivity curve, 16 definition, 16 modifying, 18 solid, 17 surface, 17 coordinate frame attributes show action, 679 create method overview, 64 definitions, 60 delete action, 466 rotate method, 782 translate method, 779 create action, 27 overview, 72

A accuracy, 2 any geometry entity delete action, 463 arc center point, 82 arc3point method curve, 130 axis method overview, 64

B bi-parametric surface, 20 blend method curve, 484 solid, 607 surface, 538 body, 11 break method curve, 474, 478, 482 example, 32 solid, 591, 595, 600, 602, 604 surface, 520, 524, 528, 532, 534 B-rep method, 41 B-rep solid, 8, 20, 24, 41 exterior shell, 41 shell, 24 building a B-rep solid, 41 building a congruent model, 31 example, 32 building a degenerate solid, 43 building a degenerate surface, 42 building optimal surfaces, 33

Main Index

812 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

curve arc3point method, 130 blend method, 484 break method, 474, 478, 482 chain method, 133 conic method, 135 delete action, 464 disasemble method, 487 extend method, 490, 496, 499, 501 extract method, 139, 143 fillet method, 145 fit method, 149 intersect method, 151, 155 manifold method, 161 mcoord method, 734 merge method, 504 mirror method, 726 mscale method, 770 offset method constant, 171 offset method variable, 173 pivot method, 742 point method, 120, 122, 125 position method, 751 refit method, 508 reverse method, 510 rotate method, 705 scale method, 715 translate method, 691 trim method, 513, 516 vsum method, 761 XYZ method, 199 curve 4 point parametric positions subordinate form, 129 curve angle show action, 663 curve arc show action, 661 curve attributes show action, 660 curve length range show action, 665 curve method, 42 curvilinear coordinate frame, 67 examples using translate and scale, 67 scale method, 67 translate method, 67

Main Index

Curvilinear in Refer. CF button, 67 cylindrical coordinate frame definition, 61

D Dassault Systemes, 2, 47 Decompose method, 38 decomposing trimmed surfaces, 38 example, 39 default colors, 20, 21, 22, 24 degenerate surfaces and solids, 42 delete action any geometry entity, 463 coordinate frame, 466 curve, 464 overview, 462 plane, 464 point, 464 solid, 464 surface, 464 vector, 464 DGA, 2, 47 Direct Geometry Access, 2, 47 disasemble method curve, 487 surface, 541 disassemble method solid, 610 display lines, 34, 41

E edge, 11 edge match method, 32 closing gaps, 15 surface, 548, 551 edge method, 42 edge refit method surface, 568 edit action, 27 overview, 470 EDS/Unigraphics, 2, 47 element connectivity, 35 element properties, 2 equivalence method point, 472

INDEX

euler method overview, 65 examples arc3point curve, 131, 132 ArcCenter point, 83 blend curve, 485, 486 solid, 608, 609 surface, 540 break curve, 475, 476, 477, 480, 481 solid, 592, 593, 594, 597, 598, 599, 601, 605, 606 surface, 521, 522, 523, 525, 529, 530,

Main Index

531, 533, 536, 537 chain curve, 134 conic curve, 137, 138 disassemble curve, 489 surface, 543 edge match surface, 550, 552 equivalencene point, 472 extend curve, 493, 494, 495, 498, 501, 503 extend surface, 554, 556, 558, 560, 563, 565, 567 extract curve, 140, 141, 142, 144 point, 85, 86 point from surface, 88 point from surface diagonal, 90 point from surface parametric, 92 fillet curve, 147, 148 fit curve, 150 interpolate point, 95, 96, 99 interpolate vector, 435 intersect curve, 152, 153, 154, 156, 157 point at edge, 101 point with curve and plane, 105 point with two curves, 102, 103, 104 point with vector and curve, 106, 107 point with vector and plane, 109 point with vector and surface, 108 manifold curve, 163 mcoord curve, 736, 737 plane, 740 point, 735 solid, 739 surface, 738 vector, 741 merge curve, 506, 507, 512, 515, 518 mirror curve, 728, 729 plane, 732 point, 727 solid, 731, 733 surface, 730 mscale

813

814 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

curve, 774, 775 point, 773 solid, 777 surface, 776 offset curve, 172, 175 offset point, 111 offset surface, 272 pierce point, 113, 114 pivot curve, 745, 746 plane, 749 point, 744 solid, 748 surface, 747 vector, 750 point curve, 121, 123, 124, 127, 128 position curve, 755, 756 point, 754 solid, 758, 759, 760 surface, 757 project point, 117, 118, 119 reverse curve, 512 solid, 618 surface, 571 rotate coordinate frame, 784, 785 curve, 708, 709 plane, 713 point, 707 solid, 712 surface, 710, 711 vectors, 714 scale curve, 719, 720 point, 717, 718 solid, 724 surface, 721, 722, 723 vector, 725 sew surface, 573 translate coordinate frame, 780, 781 curve, 695, 696, 697 plane, 703 point, 693, 694

Main Index

solid, 701, 702 surface, 698, 699, 700 vector, 704 trim curve, 514 vsum curve, 765, 766 point, 763, 764 solid, 769 surface, 767, 768 XYZ curve, 200 point, 79, 80, 81 solid, 202 surface, 201 extend method curve, 490, 496, 499, 501 surface, 553, 555, 557, 559, 561, 564, 566 extract method curve, 139, 143 multiple points, 89, 91 point, 84 single point, 87

F face, 11 face method, 43 field function, 4, 18 fillet method curve, 145 fit method curve, 149

G general trimmed surface, 21 geometry types, 20 global coordinate frame, 60 global model tolerance, 19 surface gaps, 14 grid, 25

H hyperpatch, 25

I IGES, 3, 20, 25, 46

INDEX

interpolate method point, 94, 97 vector, 434 intersect method curve, 151, 155 intersect parameters subordinate form, 158 point, 100 intersect parameters subordinate form, 158 IsoMesh, 19, 24, 38

L line, 25 load/BC, 2 loads/BC, 2

M manifold method curve, 161 match method closing gaps, 15 mathematical representation, 2 mcoord method curve, 734 plane, 734 point, 734 solid, 734 surface, 734 vector, 734 merge method curve, 504 refit, 508 meshing, 13 mirror method curve, 726 plane, 726 point, 726 solid, 726 surface, 726 vector, 726 MSC.Patran CATIA, 47 MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 47, 54 .geo intermediate file, 56 executing from MSC.Patran, 55 executing from Pro/ENGINEER, 55

Main Index

MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47 features, 47 global model tolerance, 48 user tips, 48 mscale method curve, 770 point, 770 solid, 770 surface, 770 multiple points extract method, 89, 91

N native geometry, 3 neutral file, 3, 25, 46, 57 nodes, 810 renumber, 810 nodes on curve show action, 667 nodes on point show action, 658 nodes on surface show action, 672 normal method overview, 65

O offset method constant curve, 171 point, 110 surface, 271 variable curve, 173

P p3_proe, 55 parameterization B-rep solid, 8 curve, 5 definition, 4 point, 4 solid, 8 surface, 6 trimmed surface, 7 parameterized geometry, 3

815

816 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

parametric axes, 16 plotting, 18 parametric cubic equation, 25 parametric cubic geometry, 57 definition, 25 limitations, 26 recommendations, 25, 26 subtended arcs, 26 parametric curve, 20 Parametric Technology, 2, 47 Parasolid tips for accessing, 49 patch, 25 PATRAN 2 Convention, 28, 29 PATRAN 2 Convention button, 25, 28 Paver, 38 pentahedron, 43 pierce method point, 112 pivot method curve, 742 plane, 742 point, 742 solid, 742 surface, 742 vector, 742 plane mcoord method, 734 mirror method, 726 pivot method, 742 position method, 751 rotate method, 705 translate method, 691 plane angle show action, 682 plane distance show action, 684

point, 20 delete action, 464 equivalence method, 472 extract method, 84 interpolate method, 94, 97 intersect method, 100 mcoord method, 734 mirror method, 726 mscale method, 770 offset method, 110 pierce method, 112 pivot method, 742 position method, 751 project method, 115 rotate method, 705 scale method, 715 translate method, 691 vsum method, 761 XYZ method, 78 point distance show action, 644 point location show action, 642 point method curve, 120, 122, 125 curve 4 point parametric positions subordinate form, 129 position method curve, 751 plane, 751 point, 751 solid, 751 surface, 751 vector, 751 pressure load, 4, 18, 35 Pro/ENGINEER, 2, 47 project method point, 115

R rectangular coordinate frame definition, 60 refit method solid, 613 renumber action, 809

Main Index

INDEX

reverse method, 18, 34 curve, 510 solid, 352, 353, 618 surface, 570 rotate method coordinate frame, 782 curve, 705 point, 705 solid, 705 surface, 705

S scale method curve, 715 point, 715 solid, 715 surface, 715 vector, 715 sew method surface, 572 show action coordinate frame attributes, 679 curve angle, 663 curve arc, 661 curve attributes, 660 length range, 665 nodes on curve, 667 nodes on point, 658 nodes on surface, 672 overview, 640 plane angle, 682 plane distance, 684 point distance, 644 point location, 642 showing plane attributes, 681 showing vector attributes, 686 solid attributes, 677 surface area range, 671 surface attributes, 669 surface normals, 674 show action information form, 641 simply trimmed surface, 22 single point extract method, 87

Main Index

solid blend method, 607 break method, 591, 595, 600, 602, 604 delete action, 464 disassemble method, 610 mcoord method, 734 mirror method, 726 mscale method, 770 pivot method, 742 position method, 751 refit method, 613 reverse method, 352, 353, 618 rotate method, 705 scale method, 715 translate method, 691 vsum method, 761 XYZ method, 199 solid attributes show action, 677 solids type of, 24 spherical coordinate frame definition, 62 subtract method surface, 574 suface normals show action, 674

817

818 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

surface blend method, 538 break method, 520, 524, 528, 532, 534 delete action, 464 disassemble method, 541 edge match method, 548, 551 extend method, 553, 555, 557, 559, 561, 564, 566 mcoord method, 734 mirror method, 726 mscale method, 770 offset method, 271 pivot method, 742 position method, 751 refit method, 568 reverse method, 570 rotate method, 705 scale method, 715 sew method, 572 sharp corners, 34 subtract method, 574 top and bottom locations, 35 translate method, 691 vsum method, 761 XYZ method, 199 surface area range show action, 671 surface attributes show action, 669 surface boundaries verify action, 788 surface method, 43 surface normals, 18, 34, 41 example of aligning, 35

T TetMesh, 24, 25, 41 tetrahedron, 43 topologic entities edge, 11 face, 11 vertex, 11 topological congruency, 31 definition, 13 gaps, 14

Main Index

topology definition, 10 ID assignment, 12, 13, 18 transform action overview, 688 translate method coordinate frame, 779 curve, 691 plane, 691 point, 691 solid, 691 surface, 691 vector, 691 trim method curve, 513, 516 trimmed surface, 20 decomposing, 38 default colors, 20 definition, 20 general trimmed, 21 parent surface, 20 simply trimmed, 22 tri-parametric solid, 8, 20, 24 types of geometry, 27 curves, 28 solids, 29 surfaces, 29

U update graphics subordinate form, 791

V vector interpolate method, 434 mcoord method, 734 mirror method, 726 pivot method, 742 position method, 751 rotate method, 705 scale method, 715 translate method, 691 verify action surface boundaries, 788 update graphics subordinate form, 791 vertex, 11

INDEX

volume solid, 20 vsum method curve, 761 point, 761 solid, 761 surface, 761

W wedge solid, 43

X XYZ method curve, 199 point, 78 solid, 199 surface, 199

Main Index

819

820 Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2

Main Index